Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 488

11i Financial Applications Overview

Student Guide

Volume 1

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

D11439GC10

n
r
te

Edition 1.0
October 2001

n
I
e

D33973

r
O

l
c
a

I
A
O

s
U

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.


This documentation contains proprietary information of Oracle Corporation. It is provided under a license agreement containing
restrictions on use and disclosure and is also protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. If this
documentation is delivered to a U.S. Government Agency of the Department of Defense, then it is delivered with Restricted Rights
and the following legend is applicable:
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions for commercial computer software and shall be deemed
to be Restricted Rights software under Federal law, as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of DFARS 252.227-7013, Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software (October 1988).
This material or any portion of it may not be copied in any form or by any means without the express prior written permission of the
Education Products group of Oracle Corporation. Any other copying is a violation of copyright law and may result in civil and/or
criminal penalties.
If this documentation is delivered to a U.S. Government Agency not within the Department of Defense, then it is delivered with
Restricted Rights, as defined in FAR 52.227-14, Rights in Data-General, including Alternate III (June 1987).
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the documentation, please report
them in writing to Worldwide Education Services, Oracle Corporation, 500 Oracle Parkway, Box SB-6, Redwood Shores, CA 94065.
Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error-free.
Oracle and all references to Oracle Products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only, and may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Author
Jill Burton
Technical Contributors and Reviewers

y
l
n

Andrea Auld, Ruthann Enthof, Wally Gardipe, Adrienne Hamilton-Smith, Ray Kuzemchak,
Deborah Piper, Ron Reiley, Paul Scott

O
e

I
A
oracletutor
O
&
l
a
n
r

This book was published using:

a
r
O

e
l
c

e
t
In

s
U

Table of Contents
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 1-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
Planning for the Implementation of the Primary Financial Applications ............................ 1-4
Oracle Financial Application Topics Covered in This Course............................................ 1-5
Additional Oracle Financials Information........................................................................... 1-7
The Big Picture ................................................................................................................... 1-8
Data Passed to General Ledger ........................................................................................... 1-9
Shared Entities: Account Numbers ..................................................................................... 1-10
Shared Entities: Vendors..................................................................................................... 1-11
Shared Entities: Customers ................................................................................................. 1-12
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
Oracle General Ledger ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Oracle General Ledger ........................................................................................................ 2-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Oracle General Ledger Process........................................................................................... 2-5
Major Functions and Features ............................................................................................. 2-6
Using Oracle General Ledger: Overview ............................................................................ 2-7
Integrating with Subledgers................................................................................................. 2-8
Using Open Interfaces......................................................................................................... 2-9
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-10
The Global Accounting Engine Program: Overview........................................................... 2-11
Why Is the Global Accounting Engine Needed?................................................................. 2-12
Features of the Global Accounting Engine.......................................................................... 2-13
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-15
Elements Required for a Set of Books ................................................................................ 2-16
Chart of Accounts Structure ................................................................................................ 2-17
Accounting Calendar........................................................................................................... 2-18
Unlimited Currencies .......................................................................................................... 2-19
Chart of Accounts Structure ................................................................................................ 2-20
Creating Accounting Flexfields........................................................................................... 2-21
Defining Value Sets ............................................................................................................ 2-22
How to Create Value Sets ................................................................................................... 2-23
Validation Types ................................................................................................................. 2-24
Defining Value Sets ............................................................................................................ 2-25
Defining Segment Values.................................................................................................... 2-26
Flexible Account Hierarchies.............................................................................................. 2-29
Using Dynamic Insertion..................................................................................................... 2-30
Defining Flexfield Security Rules ....................................................................................... 2-31
Defining Cross-Validation Rules ........................................................................................ 2-32
Set of Books Options - Multiple Reporting Currencies....................................................... 2-33
Creating a Set of Books Considerations.............................................................................. 2-34
Sharing a Set of Books Across Oracle Applications ........................................................... 2-35
Accounting Flexfield Considerations .................................................................................. 2-36
Identifying Business Requirements ..................................................................................... 2-37
Analyzing Reporting Requirements .................................................................................... 2-39
Creating a Worldwide Chart of Accounts ........................................................................... 2-40
Creating Vertical Structures ................................................................................................ 2-41
Using Independent and Dependent Segments ..................................................................... 2-42
Designing Size and Segment Numbering Schemes ............................................................. 2-43

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


i

s
U

Sequencing the Segments.................................................................................................... 2-44


Using Dynamic Insertion and Cross Validation Rules ........................................................ 2-45
Using Flexfield Security Rules............................................................................................ 2-46
Summary Accounts ............................................................................................................. 2-47
Detail vs Summary Accounts .............................................................................................. 2-48
Summary and Parent Accounts ........................................................................................... 2-49
Defining Shorthand Aliases................................................................................................. 2-50
Defining Units of Measure .................................................................................................. 2-51
Average Balancing .............................................................................................................. 2-52
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-53
Overview............................................................................................................................. 2-54
Journal Entry Types ............................................................................................................ 2-55
Journal Creation Methods ................................................................................................... 2-57
Accounting Calendar........................................................................................................... 2-59
Posting Journals .................................................................................................................. 2-61
Drilling Down to Journal Detail.......................................................................................... 2-62
T-Accounts.......................................................................................................................... 2-63
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 2-64
Importing Journal Entries: Overview .................................................................................. 2-65
Recurring Journals: Overview............................................................................................. 2-66
MassAllocations: Overview ................................................................................................ 2-67
Defining MassAllocation Formulas..................................................................................... 2-68
Overview of the Period Closing Process ............................................................................. 2-69
Year-End Closing Journals.................................................................................................. 2-70
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-71
Overview of Intercompany Accounting .............................................................................. 2-72
Overview of Intercompany Journals.................................................................................... 2-73
Overview of Segment Qualifiers ......................................................................................... 2-74
Intercompany Balancing Within a Single Set of Books ...................................................... 2-75
Intercompany Balancing Within a Single Set of Books (continued) ................................... 2-76
Intercompany Balancing Options ........................................................................................ 2-78
Standard Intercompany Balancing Example ....................................................................... 2-79
Standard Intercompany Balancing Example (continued) .................................................... 2-80
Intercompany Balancing Options ........................................................................................ 2-81
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing Example...................................................................... 2-82
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing Example (continued)................................................... 2-83
Intercompany Balancing Options ........................................................................................ 2-84
Intercompany Segment Balancing Example........................................................................ 2-85
Intercompany Segment Balancing Example (continued)..................................................... 2-86
Intercompany Balancing Options ........................................................................................ 2-87
Clearing Company Example Enhanced Intercompany Balancing ....................................... 2-88
Clearing Company Example Enhanced Intercompany Balancing (cont)............................. 2-89
Clearing Company Example using the Intercompany Segment........................................... 2-91
Clearing Company Example Using the Intercompany Segment (cont) ............................... 2-92
Implementation Considerations for Intercompany Balancing ............................................. 2-95
Overview of Global Intercompany System ......................................................................... 2-96
Global Intercompany System (GIS) .................................................................................... 2-97
GIS Implementation ............................................................................................................ 2-98
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-99
Concepts You Should Know ............................................................................................... 2-100
Working with Multiple Currencies...................................................................................... 2-101
Foreign Currency Concepts................................................................................................. 2-102
Integrating with Subledgers................................................................................................. 2-103
Defining and Enabling Currencies ...................................................................................... 2-104
Predefined Daily Conversion Rate Types ........................................................................... 2-105

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


ii

s
U

What is Multiple Reporting Currencies?............................................................................. 2-106


Products Supporting MRC .................................................................................................. 2-107
When Do You Use MRC?................................................................................................... 2-108
Multiple Sets of Books Primary and Reporting................................................................... 2-109
Planning Your MRC Implementation.................................................................................. 2-110
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-111
Overview of Consolidations................................................................................................ 2-112
Consolidation Workbench................................................................................................... 2-113
Steps to Perform Consolidations ......................................................................................... 2-114
Consolidation Implementation Considerations.................................................................... 2-115
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-116
What is an Oracle Budget?.................................................................................................. 2-117
Anatomy of an Oracle Budget............................................................................................. 2-119
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 2-120
Budget Organizations.......................................................................................................... 2-121
Defining Budget Accounts .................................................................................................. 2-123
AutoCopying Budget Organizations ................................................................................... 2-124
Entering Budget Amounts ................................................................................................... 2-125
Finalizing Budgets .............................................................................................................. 2-126
Types of Budget Entry Methods ......................................................................................... 2-127
Budgetary Control............................................................................................................... 2-128
Encumbrances ..................................................................................................................... 2-129
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 2-130
Reporting and Analysis Capabilities ................................................................................... 2-131
Standard Reports and Listings............................................................................................. 2-132
Standard Reports and Listings (continued) ......................................................................... 2-133
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 2-135
Financial Statement Generator ............................................................................................ 2-136
Customized Financial Reports............................................................................................. 2-137
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 2-138
Practice and Solution: Create a Journal Entry Batch....................................................... 2-139
Practice and Solution: Statistical Journal Entry .............................................................. 2-141
Practice and Solution: Journal Posting............................................................................ 2-142
Practice and Solution: Reviewing Account Balances...................................................... 2-144
Practice and Solution: Defining a Budget ....................................................................... 2-145
Practice and Solution: Define a Budget Organization..................................................... 2-146
Practice and Solution: Assigning Budget Accounts ........................................................ 2-148
Practice and Solution: Entering Budget Amounts ........................................................... 2-149
Practice and Solution: Running Standard Reports .......................................................... 2-151
Practice and Solution: Creating and Submitting a Request Set ...................................... 2-152

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

Applications Desktop Integrator.......................................................................................... 3-1


Applications Desktop Integrator ......................................................................................... 3-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 3-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
ADI Family ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
General Ledger Functionality.............................................................................................. 3-6
Assets Functionality ............................................................................................................ 3-7
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-8
ADI Journal Wizard Features.............................................................................................. 3-9
Integrating with Oracle General Ledger.............................................................................. 3-10
Create Journal Worksheet ................................................................................................... 3-11
Number of Journals ............................................................................................................. 3-12
Results................................................................................................................................. 3-13
Entering Flexfield Combinations ........................................................................................ 3-14
Cross Validation Rules........................................................................................................ 3-15

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


iii

Uploading Journal Entries to Oracle General Ledger ......................................................... 3-16


Using Journal Upload Options ............................................................................................ 3-17
Using Journal Import Options ............................................................................................. 3-19
Troubleshooting the Import Process ................................................................................... 3-20
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-21
Overview of the Applications Desktop Integrator............................................................... 3-22
Audit Trail Implications...................................................................................................... 3-23
Overview of Budget Wizard ............................................................................................... 3-24
Budget Wizard Possibilities ................................................................................................ 3-25
Budget Wizard Key Benefits............................................................................................... 3-26
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-27
Overview............................................................................................................................. 3-28
Overview (continued).......................................................................................................... 3-29
Define Report Features ....................................................................................................... 3-30
Define Report Features (continued) .................................................................................... 3-31
Integrating with Oracle GL ................................................................................................. 3-32
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-33
Analyze Report Features ..................................................................................................... 3-34
Analyze Report Features (continued).................................................................................. 3-35
How to Start Analyze Report .............................................................................................. 3-36
How to Start Analyze Report (continued) ........................................................................... 3-37
About the Analyze Report Toolbar ..................................................................................... 3-38
Possible Drilldown Flows ................................................................................................... 3-39
Using Dimensions and Display Options.............................................................................. 3-40
How to Change Your View................................................................................................. 3-41
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-42
Overview............................................................................................................................. 3-43
Use Request Center ............................................................................................................. 3-44
Using the Request Center .................................................................................................... 3-45
Toolbar Icons ...................................................................................................................... 3-46
Toolbar Icons (continued)................................................................................................... 3-47
Selecting a Report Type ...................................................................................................... 3-51
Selecting a Report Type (continued)................................................................................... 3-52
Selecting Publishing Options .............................................................................................. 3-53
Overview of Web Publishing .............................................................................................. 3-54
Using Themes ..................................................................................................................... 3-55
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-56
Overview............................................................................................................................. 3-57
Integrating with General Ledger ......................................................................................... 3-58
Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy............................................................................... 3-60
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 3-61
ADI Integration ................................................................................................................... 3-62
ADI Features ....................................................................................................................... 3-63
Create Assets....................................................................................................................... 3-64
Creating Assets.................................................................................................................... 3-65
Import Text Files................................................................................................................. 3-66
Importing Text Files............................................................................................................ 3-67
Record Physical Inventory .................................................................................................. 3-68
Recording Physical Inventory ............................................................................................. 3-69
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 3-70
Practice and Solution: Using the Journal Wizard............................................................ 3-71
Practice and Solution: Using the Report Wizard............................................................. 3-73
Practice and Solution: Using the Request Center ............................................................ 3-74

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Suppliers ................................................................................................................................ 4-1


Suppliers ............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


iv

Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 4-3


Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Supplier and Supplier Site Settings ..................................................................................... 4-5
Entering Supplier Information............................................................................................. 4-6
Overview of Entering Information at the Supplier Site Level ............................................. 4-8
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 4-9
Entering Flexible Address Format Information................................................................... 4-10
Entering Employees as Suppliers ........................................................................................ 4-11
Maintaining Supplier and Supplier Site Information........................................................... 4-12
Supplier Reports.................................................................................................................. 4-13
Merging Suppliers............................................................................................................... 4-15
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 4-17
Relationship to Release 11i Applications............................................................................ 4-18
Oracle Purchasing ............................................................................................................... 4-20
Oracle Purchasing Overview............................................................................................... 4-21
Integrating with Oracle Applications .................................................................................. 4-22
Implementing Supplier Management .................................................................................. 4-23
Multiple Organization Overview......................................................................................... 4-24
Defining Approved Suppliers.............................................................................................. 4-26
Approved Suppliers List Overview..................................................................................... 4-27
Rules to Specify Preferred Suppliers: Sourcing Rules ........................................................ 4-28
For More Information ......................................................................................................... 4-29
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 4-30
Practice and Solution: Creating a New Supplier ............................................................. 4-31
Oracle Purchasing................................................................................................................. 5-1
Oracle Purchasing ............................................................................................................... 5-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 5-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Product Integration Overview ............................................................................................. 5-5
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-6
Why Purchase Requisitions? ............................................................................................... 5-7
Where Purchase Requisitions Fit ........................................................................................ 5-8
Oracle Purchasing Purchase Requisitions ........................................................................... 5-9
Information Flow for Purchase Requisitions....................................................................... 5-10
Access Levels...................................................................................................................... 5-11
Options for Security, Approval Limits, and Approval Routing........................................... 5-12
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-13
Overview of a Request for Quotation.................................................................................. 5-14
Sourcing Rules Overview.................................................................................................... 5-15
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-16
Purchase Order Process....................................................................................................... 5-17
Process Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 5-18
Where Purchase Orders Come From................................................................................... 5-19
Information Flow for Purchase Orders................................................................................ 5-20
Purchase Order Management Interfaces.............................................................................. 5-21
E-Commerce Capabilities ................................................................................................... 5-22
Overview of Purchase Order Creation ................................................................................ 5-23
Overview of Purchase Order Maintenance.......................................................................... 5-24
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 5-25
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-26
Receiving in Oracle Purchasing .......................................................................................... 5-27
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 5-28
Required Setup Steps for Oracle Purchasing...................................................................... 5-29
Purchasing Accounting Considerations............................................................................... 5-30
Overview of Purchasing Period-End Accrual Cycle ........................................................... 5-31

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


v

s
U

Accounting Implementation Considerations ....................................................................... 5-32


Inventory Setup Requirements ............................................................................................ 5-33
Inventory Implementation Considerations .......................................................................... 5-34
Purchasing Options ............................................................................................................. 5-36
Financial Options ................................................................................................................ 5-37
Requisition Implementation Considerations........................................................................ 5-38
Purchase Order Implementation Considerations ................................................................. 5-40
Receiving Implementation Considerations.......................................................................... 5-41
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 5-42
Practice and Solution: Create a Purchase Order.............................................................. 5-43
Oracle Payables..................................................................................................................... 6-1
Oracle Payables................................................................................................................... 6-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 6-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Overview of Oracle Payables .............................................................................................. 6-5
Oracle Product Integration .................................................................................................. 6-6
Oracle Payables Integration ................................................................................................ 6-7
Five Major Processes .......................................................................................................... 6-10
Oracle Payables Processes .................................................................................................. 6-11
Flow of Default Values ....................................................................................................... 6-12
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Entering Invoices: Overview............................................................................................... 6-14
Oracle Payables Invoice Types ........................................................................................... 6-15
Invoice Distribution Types.................................................................................................. 6-17
Approving Invoices: Overview ........................................................................................... 6-19
Approving Invoices............................................................................................................. 6-20
Accounting for Invoices ...................................................................................................... 6-21
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 6-22
Overview of Expense Reporting ......................................................................................... 6-23
Setting Up Invoice Payables Options.................................................................................. 6-24
Invoice-Matching Considerations ....................................................................................... 6-25
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 6-26
Prepayment Considerations................................................................................................. 6-27
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 6-28
Issuing Payments: Overview ............................................................................................... 6-29
Payment Features ................................................................................................................ 6-30
Oracle Payables Payment Methods ..................................................................................... 6-32
Future-Dated Payments ....................................................................................................... 6-33
Payment Batches: Overview of the Steps............................................................................ 6-34
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 6-35
Accounting for Payments .................................................................................................... 6-36
Cash Control Features ......................................................................................................... 6-37
Defining Pay Groups........................................................................................................... 6-38
Defining Payment Terms..................................................................................................... 6-39
Taking Invoice Discounts.................................................................................................... 6-40
Discount Reports................................................................................................................. 6-41
Defining Banks.................................................................................................................... 6-42
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 6-44
Setting Up Financials Options for Payments....................................................................... 6-45
Setting Up Payables Options for Payments......................................................................... 6-46
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 6-48
Overview of the Period Closing Process ............................................................................. 6-49
Transferring Accounting Details to the General Ledger ..................................................... 6-50
Accounting and Reconciliation Reports.............................................................................. 6-51
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 6-52

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


vi

s
U

Overview of Tax in Oracle Applications............................................................................. 6-53


Global Taxes Overview....................................................................................................... 6-55
Tax/VAT Overview ............................................................................................................ 6-56
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 6-58
Practice and Solution Template....................................................................................... 6-59
Practice and Solution: Defining a Bank .......................................................................... 6-62
Practice and Solution: Creating a Payment Batch ........................................................... 6-64
Customers .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Customers............................................................................................................................ 7-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 7-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 7-4
Managing Customers........................................................................................................... 7-5
What is the New Customer Model? .................................................................................... 7-6
New Customer Model Benefit............................................................................................. 7-7
Entities of the New Customer Model .................................................................................. 7-8
New Customer Model ......................................................................................................... 7-9
Organization or Person Customer Registry ......................................................................... 7-10
Organization or Person Customer Relationships................................................................. 7-11
Customer Accounts ............................................................................................................. 7-12
Customer Accounts Link with Organization or Person Customer....................................... 7-13
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 7-14
Profile Classes..................................................................................................................... 7-15
Customer Profile Class Characteristics ............................................................................... 7-16
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 7-17
Customer Entry Methods .................................................................................................... 7-18
Business Issues.................................................................................................................... 7-19
Using Standard and Quick Customer Entry......................................................................... 7-20
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 7-22
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 7-23
Customer Relationships....................................................................................................... 7-24
Customer Relationship Examples........................................................................................ 7-26
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 7-27
Merge Overview.................................................................................................................. 7-28
Controlling the Merge Process............................................................................................ 7-29
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 7-31
Practice and Solution: Define a Customer Profile Class ................................................. 7-32
Practice and Solution: Entering a New Customer ........................................................... 7-34

O
e

y
l
n

I
A
O

s
U

Oracle Order Management .................................................................................................. 8-1


Oracle Order Management .................................................................................................. 8-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 8-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 8-4
Oracle Order Management Suite......................................................................................... 8-5
Basic Pricing (Part of OM) ................................................................................................. 8-6
Oracle Shipping Execution
(Packaged with OM) ...................................................... 8-7
Oracle Order Management Features.................................................................................... 8-8
Order Management Interfaces ............................................................................................. 8-9
Overview: Order Management Integration Points............................................................... 8-10
Order Management Portal (Part of OM) ............................................................................. 8-12
Credit Card Processing........................................................................................................ 8-13
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 8-14
Basic Order Process ............................................................................................................ 8-15
Order Entry Methods .......................................................................................................... 8-16
Basic Order Process Flows.................................................................................................. 8-17
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 8-18

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


vii

Returns ................................................................................................................................ 8-19


Vendor Drop Shipments...................................................................................................... 8-20
Vendor Drop Ship or Combination Standard with Drop Ship Order Flow ......................... 8-21
Pricing................................................................................................................................. 8-22
Configurator ........................................................................................................................ 8-23
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 8-24
Standard Return................................................................................................................... 8-25
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 8-26
Setup and Implementation................................................................................................... 8-27
Reports ................................................................................................................................ 8-29
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 8-30
Shipping Execution Concepts ............................................................................................. 8-31
Material Picking (Pick Release).......................................................................................... 8-36
Pick Confirmation ............................................................................................................... 8-37
Ship Confirmation Business Flow....................................................................................... 8-39
Prerequisites for Ship Confirmation.................................................................................... 8-40
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 8-41
Practice and Solution: Create Sales Order and Invoice................................................... 8-42
Oracle Receivables ................................................................................................................ 9-1
Oracle Receivables.............................................................................................................. 9-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 9-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-4
Overview of Receivables .................................................................................................... 9-5
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-6
Transaction Overview ......................................................................................................... 9-7
Transaction Classes............................................................................................................. 9-8
Invoice Entry Methods........................................................................................................ 9-10
Standard Invoice Line Types............................................................................................... 9-11
Completing Transactions..................................................................................................... 9-12
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 9-13
Creating Invoices for Services ............................................................................................ 9-14
Invoicing Rules and Accounting Rules ............................................................................... 9-15
Invoice Correction Methods................................................................................................ 9-16
Overview of Corrections ..................................................................................................... 9-17
Applying Credits ................................................................................................................. 9-19
Comparing Commitment Types .......................................................................................... 9-20
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-21
AutoInvoice Overview ........................................................................................................ 9-22
Integration ........................................................................................................................... 9-23
AutoInvoice Process ........................................................................................................... 9-24
What Occurs During AutoInvoice....................................................................................... 9-25
AutoInvoice Validation Checks- Overview......................................................................... 9-26
Setting Up AutoInvoice....................................................................................................... 9-27
Implementation Considerations for AutoInvoice ................................................................ 9-28
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-29
Implementation Considerations for Converting Invoices .................................................... 9-30
Required Setup Steps for Transactions ............................................................................... 9-31
Profile Options .................................................................................................................... 9-32
Optional Setup Steps for Transactions ................................................................................ 9-33
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-34
Overview of Receipts .......................................................................................................... 9-35
Receipt Entry Methods........................................................................................................ 9-36
Entering Manual Receipts ................................................................................................... 9-37
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 9-38
Entering AutoLockbox Receipts ......................................................................................... 9-39

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


viii

s
U

Automatic Receipts ............................................................................................................. 9-40


Credit Card Receipt Process ............................................................................................... 9-41
Setting Up Credit Card Receipts ......................................................................................... 9-43
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-44
Collection Cycle.................................................................................................................. 9-45
Collection Scenarios ........................................................................................................... 9-46
Oracle Receivables Reports ................................................................................................ 9-47
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 9-48
Overview of US Sales Tax .................................................................................................. 9-49
US Sales Tax....................................................................................................................... 9-50
Oracle Receivables Tax Overview...................................................................................... 9-51
Global Taxes Overview....................................................................................................... 9-52
Tax/VAT Overview ............................................................................................................ 9-53
Oracle Order Management Global Taxes Overview ........................................................... 9-54
Oracle Receivables Global Taxes Overview....................................................................... 9-55
Setup Steps.......................................................................................................................... 9-56
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 9-57
Practice and Solution: Creating a Standard Invoice ........................................................ 9-58
Practice and Solution: Creating Recurring Invoices........................................................ 9-60
Practice and Solution: Enter and Apply Receipts............................................................ 9-61
Oracle Asset Management.................................................................................................... 10-1
Oracle Asset Management................................................................................................... 10-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 10-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-4
Managing Fixed Assets ....................................................................................................... 10-5
Managing Assets ................................................................................................................. 10-6
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-7
Oracle Assets Transactions ................................................................................................. 10-8
Adding an Asset Manually .................................................................................................. 10-9
Demonstration..................................................................................................................... 10-10
Adjusting Assets.................................................................................................................. 10-11
Adjusting the Value of Assets ............................................................................................. 10-12
Depreciating an Asset ......................................................................................................... 10-13
Depreciation........................................................................................................................ 10-14
Depreciation Methods ......................................................................................................... 10-15
Retiring an Asset ................................................................................................................. 10-16
Retiring and Reinstating Assets........................................................................................... 10-17
Viewing Asset Information ................................................................................................. 10-18
Viewing Assets Online........................................................................................................ 10-19
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-20
Adding Assets from External Sources Using Mass Additions ............................................ 10-21
Mass Additions ................................................................................................................... 10-22
Adding an Asset from Invoice Lines................................................................................... 10-23
Adding and Capitalizing a CIP Asset.................................................................................. 10-24
Integrating with Capital Projects......................................................................................... 10-25
Using the Mass Additions Interface .................................................................................... 10-26
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-27
Budgeting............................................................................................................................ 10-28
Projecting Depreciation....................................................................................................... 10-29
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-30
Creating a Tax Book ........................................................................................................... 10-31
Creating Tax Books ............................................................................................................ 10-32
Maintaining a Tax Book...................................................................................................... 10-33
Sharing Information Among Books .................................................................................... 10-34
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-36

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


ix

s
U

Reporting, Reconciling, and Inventory Processing ............................................................. 10-37


Reconciling ......................................................................................................................... 10-38
Performing Asset Inventory ................................................................................................ 10-39
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 10-40
Integrating the Oracle Assets Product ................................................................................. 10-41
Using Mass Additions to Integrate with Other Products ..................................................... 10-42
Creating Journal Entries to the General Ledger .................................................................. 10-43
Setting Up Oracle Assets..................................................................................................... 10-44
Setting Up Controls in Oracle Assets.................................................................................. 10-46
Asset Accounting Information ............................................................................................ 10-47
Defining Depreciation......................................................................................................... 10-48
Asset Categories.................................................................................................................. 10-49
Setting Up Additional Options............................................................................................ 10-50
Planning the Implementation............................................................................................... 10-51
Deciding on the Setup Structure.......................................................................................... 10-52
Determining the Conversion Period .................................................................................... 10-53
Obtaining Asset Information ............................................................................................... 10-54
Inquiring About Company History...................................................................................... 10-55
Planning Flexfield Structures .............................................................................................. 10-56
Planning the Category Flexfield.......................................................................................... 10-57
Planning the Location Flexfield .......................................................................................... 10-58
Planning the Asset Key Flexfield ........................................................................................ 10-59
Planning Asset Numbering.................................................................................................. 10-60
Transferring Information into Oracle Assets....................................................................... 10-61
Transferring Information..................................................................................................... 10-62
Reconciling Asset Information............................................................................................ 10-63
Considering Other Conversion Issues ................................................................................. 10-64
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 10-65
Practice and Solution: Manual Asset Additions .............................................................. 10-66
Oracle Cash Management .................................................................................................... 11-1
Oracle Cash Management ................................................................................................... 11-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 11-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 11-4
Overview of Reconciliation................................................................................................. 11-5
Oracle Receivables and Payables........................................................................................ 11-6
Oracle General Ledger, Payroll, and External Systems...................................................... 11-7
Reconciliation Integration ................................................................................................... 11-8
Reconciling Bank Statements Automatically ...................................................................... 11-9
Entering Bank Information.................................................................................................. 11-10
Bank Reconciliation Overview ........................................................................................... 11-11
Bank Statement Open Interface........................................................................................... 11-12
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 11-13
Oracle Cash Management Reports ...................................................................................... 11-14
Oracle Cash Management Statement Reports ..................................................................... 11-15
Oracle Cash Management Transaction Reports .................................................................. 11-16
Oracle Cash Management Listings...................................................................................... 11-17
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 11-18
Cash Forecasting Overview................................................................................................. 11-19
Defining a Forecast Template ............................................................................................. 11-20
Generating a Cash Forecast................................................................................................. 11-21
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 11-22
Setting Up Oracle Cash Management and Related Products............................................... 11-23
Setting Up Oracle General Ledger ...................................................................................... 11-24
Setting Up Oracle Payables for Cash Management Integration ......................................... 11-25
Setting Up Banks for Oracle Cash Management................................................................ 11-26

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


x

s
U

Setting Up Oracle Receivables for Oracle Cash Management ........................................... 11-27


Setting Up for Bank Reconciliation Integration with Payroll.............................................. 11-28
Setting Up Payroll for Oracle Cash Management Integration ............................................. 11-29
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 11-30
Oracle Workflow................................................................................................................... 12-1
Oracle Workflow................................................................................................................. 12-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 12-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 12-4
Oracle Workflow................................................................................................................. 12-5
Workflow Driven Business Processes................................................................................. 12-6
Example Workflow Processes............................................................................................. 12-7
Designing Business Processes for Change .......................................................................... 12-8
Workflow is Essential ......................................................................................................... 12-9
Expense Report Processing ................................................................................................. 12-10
Common Expense Reports Questions ................................................................................. 12-11
Expense Report Processing ................................................................................................. 12-12
Expense Report Processing @ Oracle................................................................................. 12-13
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 12-14
Workflow Overview............................................................................................................ 12-15
Workflow Architecture ....................................................................................................... 12-16
Oracle Workflow Features and Definitions......................................................................... 12-17
Oracle Workflow Builder.................................................................................................... 12-18
Workflow Process Definition.............................................................................................. 12-19
Supported Process Constructs ............................................................................................. 12-20
Workflow Engine ................................................................................................................ 12-22
Workflow Definitions Loader ............................................................................................. 12-23
Notification System............................................................................................................. 12-24
Notification Worklist Web Page ......................................................................................... 12-25
Notification Details Web Page............................................................................................ 12-26
Email Notifications ............................................................................................................. 12-27
Email Notifications - Response Template ........................................................................... 12-28
Oracle Workflow Monitor................................................................................................... 12-29
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 12-32

O
e

y
l
n

s
U

Oracle System Administration ............................................................................................. 13-1


Oracle System Administration ............................................................................................ 13-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 13-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 13-4
System Administrator Functional Block Diagram.............................................................. 13-5
System Administration Functions........................................................................................ 13-7
Managing Application Security: Overview ........................................................................ 13-8
Managing Function Security ............................................................................................... 13-9
Concurrent Requests, Programs, and Managers................................................................. 13-10
Business Needs for Concurrent Processing......................................................................... 13-11
Business Needs for Standard Request Submission.............................................................. 13-12
System Administrator Monitoring Privileges ...................................................................... 13-13
Profile Hierarchy Levels ..................................................................................................... 13-14
Personal Profile Values....................................................................................................... 13-15
System Profile Options........................................................................................................ 13-16
Auditing Oracle Applications.............................................................................................. 13-17
Auditing User Activity ........................................................................................................ 13-18
Using Document Sequences................................................................................................ 13-19
Specifying Sequence Information ....................................................................................... 13-20
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 13-21

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Oracle Flexfields.................................................................................................................... 14-1


Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xi

Oracle Flexfields ................................................................................................................. 14-2


Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 14-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 14-4
Customizing Oracle Applications........................................................................................ 14-5
Flexfield Structures and Flexfield Segments....................................................................... 14-6
Segment Prompts and Value Descriptions .......................................................................... 14-7
Validating Input Using Value Sets ...................................................................................... 14-8
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 14-9
Key and Descriptive Flexfields ........................................................................................... 14-10
Key Flexfields ..................................................................................................................... 14-11
Intelligent Keys ................................................................................................................... 14-12
Key Flexfield Example: Accounting Flexfield .................................................................... 14-14
Key Flexfield Example: Asset Category Flexfield .............................................................. 14-15
Oracle Applications Key Flexfields .................................................................................... 14-16
Descriptive Flexfields ......................................................................................................... 14-17
Using Reference Fields ....................................................................................................... 14-18
Using Different Contexts: Asset Category Flexfield ........................................................... 14-19
Oracle Applications Descriptive Flexfields (Partial).......................................................... 14-20
SRS and Flexfields.............................................................................................................. 14-21
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 14-22
Benefits of Flexfields .......................................................................................................... 14-23
Storing Flexfield Data Internally......................................................................................... 14-24
Steps to Implement a Flexfield............................................................................................ 14-25
Overview of Flexfields Summary........................................................................................ 14-26
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 14-27
Appendix A: Oracle iProcurement ...................................................................................... 15-1
Appendix A: Oracle iProcurement ...................................................................................... 15-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 15-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 15-4
What is Internet Procurement?............................................................................................ 15-5
iProcurement ....................................................................................................................... 15-6
What is Oracle Internet Procurement? ................................................................................ 15-7
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 15-8
Oracles Internet Procurement Components........................................................................ 15-9
Empower Your Users.......................................................................................................... 15-11
Ordering in the Procurement Process.................................................................................. 15-12
Ordering Using Catalog Search........................................................................................... 15-14
Non-production Procurement.............................................................................................. 15-15
Oracle Purchasing Intelligence............................................................................................ 15-16
Purchasing Intelligence System Benefits............................................................................. 15-17
More Purchasing Intelligence System Benefits ................................................................... 15-18
Purchasing Intelligence Homepage ..................................................................................... 15-19
Oracle iSupplier Portal........................................................................................................ 15-20
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 15-22

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

s
U

Appendix B: Oracle Self-Service Web Applications .......................................................... 16-1


Appendix B: Oracle Self-Service Web Applications .......................................................... 16-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 16-3
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 16-4
The Self-Service Business Model ....................................................................................... 16-5
Benefits of Self-Service ...................................................................................................... 16-6
Increase Workforce Productivity with the Employee Portal ............................................... 16-7
Agenda ................................................................................................................................ 16-8
Release 11i OSSWA ........................................................................................................... 16-9
Self-Service HR .................................................................................................................. 16-10

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xii

Oracle iStore, iPayment and iMarketing ............................................................................. 16-12


Self-Service Expenses ......................................................................................................... 16-14
Self Service Time................................................................................................................ 16-15
iReceivables ........................................................................................................................ 16-16
eTravel from Oracle ............................................................................................................ 16-18
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 16-19
Appendix C: Oracle Multi-Org............................................................................................ 17-1
Appendix C: Oracle Multi-Org ........................................................................................... 17-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 17-3
Basic Business Needs.......................................................................................................... 17-4
What Is Multi-Org? ............................................................................................................. 17-5
Multi-Org Features.............................................................................................................. 17-7
Architectural Model ............................................................................................................ 17-8
Using a Single Installation of Oracle Applications ............................................................. 17-9
Architectural Model Comparison........................................................................................ 17-10
Organization Model ............................................................................................................ 17-11
Accounting/Distribution/Materials Management Organization Model ............................... 17-17
Selling and Shipping Products from Different Set of Books............................................... 17-18
Intercompany Sales Invoicing Features............................................................................... 17-19
Global Customer and Supplier Registries ........................................................................... 17-20
Global Registries................................................................................................................. 17-21
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 17-22
Appendix D: Oracle Projects ............................................................................................... 18-1
Appendix D: Oracle Projects .............................................................................................. 18-2
Objectives ........................................................................................................................... 18-3
Purpose of Oracle Projects.................................................................................................. 18-4
How to Use Oracle Projects ................................................................................................ 18-5
Overview of Oracle Projects ............................................................................................... 18-6
Project Definition................................................................................................................ 18-8
Project Classes .................................................................................................................... 18-9
Using the Information Stored in Oracle Projects ............................................................... 18-10
Central Repository .............................................................................................................. 18-13
Project Costing.................................................................................................................... 18-14
Project Billing ..................................................................................................................... 18-15
Oracle Projects Features...................................................................................................... 18-16
Project-Tracking Tools ....................................................................................................... 18-18
Work Breakdown Structure................................................................................................. 18-20
Project Budgets ................................................................................................................... 18-21
Cost Collection and Calculation Capabilities..................................................................... 18-23
Types of Cost ...................................................................................................................... 18-24
Methods of Cost Entry ........................................................................................................ 18-25
Cost Controls ...................................................................................................................... 18-27
Cost Calculations ................................................................................................................ 18-28
Multiple-Organization Support ........................................................................................... 18-29
Multinational Support ......................................................................................................... 18-30
Function Security ................................................................................................................ 18-31
Function Security Example ................................................................................................. 18-32
Project and Labor Cost Security ......................................................................................... 18-33
Project and Function Security ............................................................................................. 18-34
Project Asset Creation......................................................................................................... 18-35
Capitalization of Project Costs............................................................................................ 18-36
Flexible Revenue Accrual and Invoicing Functions........................................................... 18-38
Revenue Accrual and Billing .............................................................................................. 18-39
Billing Controls................................................................................................................... 18-40

O
e

y
l
n

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xiii

s
U

Online Reporting and Hard Copy Reporting....................................................................... 18-42


Online Inquiry and Reporting.............................................................................................. 18-43
Sub Ledger Accounting....................................................................................................... 18-44
Full Adjustment Capabilities............................................................................................... 18-45
Transferring Transactions ................................................................................................... 18-47
Other Cost Adjustments ...................................................................................................... 18-48
Billing Transaction Adjustments......................................................................................... 18-49
Integration with Other Oracle and Non-Oracle Financial Applications ............................. 18-50
Oracle Projects Interfaces ................................................................................................... 18-51
Overview of Activity Management Gateway ...................................................................... 18-56
Integration with External Systems....................................................................................... 18-57
Overview of Oracle Project Connect................................................................................... 18-59
Attachments......................................................................................................................... 18-60
Summary ............................................................................................................................. 18-61
11i Financials Comprehensive Exercise .............................................................................. 19-1
11i Financials Comprehensive Exercise.............................................................................. 19-2
Practice and Solution: 11i Financials Comprehensive Exercise...................................... 19-3

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xiv

s
U

Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course
Before you begin this course, you should have the following qualifications:

Working experience with a general financial environment.

Prerequisites

There are no prerequisites for this course.

How This Course Is Organized


11i Financial Applications Overview is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on
exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills
introduced.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xv

s
U

Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions in Text
Convention
Bold italic

Element
Glossary term (if
there is a glossary)

Example
The algorithm inserts the new key.

Caps and
lowercase

Buttons,
check boxes,
triggers,
windows

Click the Executable button.


Select the Cant Delete Card check box.
Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the
ORD block.
Open the Master Schedule window.

Courier new,
case sensitive
(default is
lowercase)

Code output,
directory names,
filenames,
passwords,
pathnames,
URLs,
user input,
usernames

Code output: debug.set (I, 300);


Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX)
Filename: Locate the init.ora file.
Password: User tiger as your password.
Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects
URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com
User input: Enter 300
Username: Log on as scott

Initial cap

Graphics labels
(unless the term is a
proper noun)

Customer address (but Oracle Payables)

Emphasized words
and phrases,
titles of books and
courses,
variables
Interface elements
with long names
that have only
initial caps;
lesson and chapter
titles in crossreferences

Do not save changes to the database.


For further information, see Oracle7 Server
SQL Language Reference Manual.
Enter user_id@us.oracle.com,
where user_id is the name of the user.
Select Include a reusable module component
and click Finish.

Italic

Quotation
marks

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

Uppercase

cl

This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3,


Working with Objects.

SQL column
names, commands,
functions, schemas,
table names

Use the SELECT command to view


information stored in the LAST_NAME
column of the EMP table.

Element

Example

a
r
O
Convention

n
I
e

y
l
n

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xvi

Arrow
Brackets

Menu paths
Key names

Select File> Save.


Press [Enter].

Commas

Key sequences

Plus signs

Key combinations

Press and release keys one at a time:


[Alternate], [F], [D]
Press and hold these keys simultaneously:
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]

Typographic Conventions in Code


Convention
Caps and
lowercase
Lowercase

Lowercase
italic
Uppercase

Element
Oracle Forms
triggers
Column names,
table names

Example
When-Validate-Item

Passwords
PL/SQL objects

DROP USER scott


IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
(OG_GET_LAYER
(prod_pie_layer))

Syntax variables

CREATE ROLE role

SELECT last_name
FROM s_emp;

y
l
n

SQL commands and SELECT userid


FROM emp;
functions

Typographic Conventions in Navigation Paths

O
e

s
U

This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you
through Oracle Applications.

I
A
O

(N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve

&
l
a

This simplified path translates to the following:

1.

(N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches
Summary.

2.

(M) From the menu, select Query then Find.

3.

(B) Click the Approve button.

n
r
te

l
c
a

n
I
e

Notations :

r
O

(N) = Navigator

(I) = Icon

(M) = Menu

(H) = Hyperlink
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xvii

(T) = Tab

(B) = Button

Typographical Conventions in Help System Paths


This course uses a navigation path convention to represent actions you perform to find
pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.
The following help navigation path, for example
(Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals
represents the following sequence of actions:
1.

In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.

2.

Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.

3.

Under Journals, select Enter Journals.

4.

Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system
window.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Financial Applications Overview Table of Contents


xviii

s
U

Introduction
Chapter 1

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 1

Introduction

Introduction

Module 1

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this course, you should be able to do
the following:
Determine the appropriate setup options and
implementation considerations when implementing
the primary Oracle eBusiness financial applications
Describe the features and characteristics of Oracles
common modules in relation to implementing
financial applications

y
l
n

1-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 3

Planning for the Implementation of the Primary


Financial Applications
Planning for the Implementation of the
Primary Financial Applications
What are the core financial applications that you will
need to manage you enterprise?
How do you implement the flow of information from
the purchase of business items to the payment and
tracking of them?
How to you identify issues in the entry of customer
orders and receipt of payments?
What other Oracle features and products would help
you to imple ment and manage your business
processes?
How do you plan to integrate legacy system
information, and will you need to extend
applications?
1-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

y
l
n

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 4

Oracle Financial Application Topics Covered in This


Course
Oracle Financial Application Topics
Covered in This Course

Oracle General Ledger


Application Desktop Integrator
Supplier Management
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Payables
Customer Management
Oracle Order Management

y
l
n

1-4

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 5

Oracle Financial Application Topics Covered in This


Course
Oracle Financial Application Topics
Covered in This Course

Oracle Receivables
Oracle Assets
Oracle Cash Management
Oracle Workflow
Oracle Systems Administration
Oracle Flexfields

y
l
n

1-5

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 6

Additional Oracle Financials Information


Additional Oracle Financials Information
There are additional topics not part of the standard
presentation of this course that are included in
appendices at the end of this courseware. They are:
Oracle iProcurement
Oracle Self-Service Applications
Multi-Org
Oracle Projects

y
l
n

1-6

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 7

The Big Picture


The Big Picture
INVENTOR Y INTERF ACE

PO

U
P

ITEMS

INV

Account Generator

Material Receipts

MATCHING
Accrued

L
I

Receipts

MASS

ADDITIONS

FA
Additions

Au toaccounting

C
U
S
T

Material shipments

REC INTF

Cost of Goods sold

AUTOINVOICE M

Standard cost adj.

Physical inv. adj.

AP

OE

ITEMS

Expenses

AR

R
S

AR Assets

Liabilities

Revenue
TR ANSFERS TO GL

Cash out

Cash in

Depreciation

GL

Retirements
Transfers

y
l
n

1-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 8

Data Passed to General Ledger


Data Passed to General Ledger

PO

OE

INV
Material Receipts
Accrued

Material shipments

Receipts

Cost of Goods sold


Standard cost adj.
Physical inv. adj.

AP

AR

FA

Expenses

AR Assets

Liabilities

Revenue

Additions

Cash out

Cash in

Depreciation

GL

Retirements
Transfers

y
l
n

1-8

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 9

Shared Entities: Account Numbers


Shared Entities: Account Numbers
Key flexfield: Multi-part unique identifier which
allows Oracle Financial applications to be used by a
wide variety of customers with different account
structures. It is used by all financial modules.
Reporting: The requirements of all systems should
be considered. For example, the level of detail for
expense tracking vs. revenue tracking. You should
determine if you need the information in GL or if you
can get it from other systems like Project
Accounting or Sales Analyzer. This is the most
important part of financials setup.
Security: Value security controls access to account
numbers by responsibility. Cross-validation rules
prevent use of invalid combinations in all modules.

y
l
n

1-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 10

Shared Entities: Vendors


Shared Entities: Vendors
Vendors are defined in one set of tables and shared
by Purchasing, Accounts Payable, Fixed Assets
(and Projects).
Who owns the supplier master? (AP or PO)
If you use multi-org, supplier information at the
header level is visible across operating units, but
address information is visible only to the operating
unit which created it.
Implementation considerations: For example,
naming conventions, numbering, and payment
terms.
Flow of defaults: AP
Setup>Supplier>Site>Item>Document
Default accounts: Liability and prepayment.

y
l
n

1-10

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 11

Shared Entities: Customers


Shared Entities: Customers
Customers are defined in one set of tables and are
visible to Order Management, Receivables and
Projects.
Who owns the customer master? (OE or AR)
If you are using multi-org, customer information at
the header level is visible across all operating units,
address information is visible only to the operating
unit which created it.
Implementation considerations: Customer profile
information, naming conventions, payment terms,
flow of default information (standard value rule sets
in OM).

y
l
n

1-11

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 12

Summary
Summary
Upon completing this course, you should be able to:
Determine the appropriate setup options and
implementation considerations when implementing
the primary Oracle eBusiness financial applications.
Describe the features and characteristics of
Oracles common modules in relation to
implementing financial applications.

y
l
n

1-12

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 13

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Introduction
Chapter 1 - Page 14

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 1

Oracle General Ledger

Oracle General Ledger

Module 2

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to do
the following:
Describe the process flow of Oracle General Ledger
Identify the setup steps and implementation
considerations for Oracle General Ledger
Describe reporting options that can be used when
implementing Oracle applications

y
l
n

2-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 3

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 4

Oracle General Ledger Process


Oracle General Ledger Process

Setup

Transaction
proce ssing

Reporting
and analysi s

Intercompany
accounting

Consolidations
and close

y
l
n

2-4

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 5

Major Functions and Features


Major Functions and Features
Oracle General Ledger is a comprehensive financial
manage ment solution that facilitates the following
tasks:
Financial controls
Data collection
Information access
Financial reporting and analysis

y
l
n

2-5

About Oracle General Ledger


Define multiple calendars and account structures.
Use standard, reversing, and recurring journals.
Use MassAllocations to automate your cost and revenue allocations quickly and
accurately.
Use the Financial Statement Generator (FSG) to create custom financial reports.
Use the General Ledger Desktop Integrator to combine the power of Oracle
General Ledger with an Excel spreadsheet to budget, report, analyze, and enter
accounting information.
Extensive Foreign Currency Capability
Automate currency conversion, translation, and revaluation in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles.
Query and report on all foreign currencies and translated balances using single
or multiple sets of books.
Use Multiple Reporting Currencies sets of books to manage routine reporting of
foreign currency transactions.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 6

Using Oracle General Ledger: Overview


Using Oracle General Ledger: Overview

Analyze

Manipulate

Record

Oracle
General Ledger

Review

y
l
n

2-6

Record and Review Accounting Information


Import data from subsidiary ledgers, or enter journals to record actual or budget
transactions directly into Oracle General Ledger.
Enter encumbrance journals to track encumbrances through the purchase
approval process and to control spending against budgeted amounts.
Review account balances online or through standard reports.
Manipulate Accounting Information
Correct actual, budget, and encumbrance information.
Revalue and translate balances denominated in foreign currencies.
Consolidate balances from multiple sets of books.
Analyze Accounting Information
Integrate Oracle General Ledger with Oracle Financial Analyzer to simplify the
budgeting and forecasting process, to efficiently answer ad hoc requests, and to
identify areas for profit improvement.
Quickly prepare What If analyses and pro forma reports.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 7

Integrating with Subledgers


Integrating with Subledgers
Oracle General Ledger is the central repository for
accounting information, receiving transactions from
financial and manufacturing subledgers.

Oracle
General Ledger
Manufacturing
subledgers

Financial
subledgers

y
l
n

2-7

The following are different types of transactions sent from Oracle Subledgers to
Oracle General Ledger:
Product
Transaction Type
Payables
Payments and invoices
Receivables
Debit memos, on-account credits, invoices,
chargebacks, receipts, adjustments,
guarantees,other receipts, and deposits
Assets
Deferred and standard depreciation expense
transactions and asset transaction
information
Projects
Labor cost, usage cost, vendor invoice
adjustments, and revenue information
Purchasing
Accrued receipts
Cost Management/Inventory
Inventory and Work in Progress transactions

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 8

Using Open Interfaces


Using Open Interfaces
You can integrate with external systems by using
published open interfaces.
You can write import programs to import data from
an external system or from your previous
accounting system.
You can initiate a full account validation process
during import.

y
l
n

2-8

The validation process checks for several items, including:


Account combinations
Periods
Unbalanced journal entries
Foreign currency errors
Budget information
Encumbrance information
Other miscellaneous items

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 9

O
e

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 10

The Global Accounting Engine Program: Overview


The Global Accounting Engine Program:
Overview
The Global Accounting Engine program:
Provides a subledger accounting system
Provides an audit trail for legal and fiscal authorities
Ensures subledger and general ledger account
symmetry
Replaces the Transfer to General Ledger program
used in each Oracle application

y
l
n

2-10

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 11

Why Is the Global Accounting Engine Needed?


Why Is the Global Accounting Engine
Needed?
The same business case can produce different
accounting entries. These differences can be due to
different:
Valuation methods
Recognition of accounting events
Focus of interest

y
l
n

2-11

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 12

Features of the Global Accounting Engine


Features of the Global Accounting Engine
The ability to differentiate between a document and
event
A new way of numbering accounting entries
A new mechanism of closing periods
Storing all accounting entries in the same structure
and format for all applications
Ability to generate different accounting entries from
the same business transaction into different sets of
books

y
l
n

2-12

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 13

Features of the Global Accounting Engine


Features of the Global Accounting Engine
An online drilldown from the general ledger to the
original documents
Printing additional reports, such as daily journal
and reconciliation reports, to match the amounts in
the subledgers, such as receivables, payables, and
general ledger
Synchronous multiple sets of books accounting that
ensures that a business transaction is posted in all
related set of books or is posted in any set of books
Compliance with the granularity level of accounting
entries

y
l
n

2-13

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 14

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 15

Elements Required for a Set of Books


Elements Required for a Set of Books
Complete the three tasks necessary to create a set of
books.

Define a chart of accounts

Define an
accounting calendar

Define currencies

y
l
n

2-15

Set of Books
A set of books determines the functional currency, account structure, and
accounting calendar for each company or group of companies.
Each set of books has a number of options that indicate the accounting
practices you want to follow for that set of books.
Chart of Accounts
Your chart of accounts is the account structure you define to fit the specific
needs of your organization.
You can choose the number of account segments as well as the length,
name, and order of each segment.
Accounting Calendar
The accounting calendar defines an accounting year and the periods it
contains.
You can define multiple calendars and assign a different calendar to each set
of books.
Currencies
You can select the functional currency for your set of books as well as other
currencies that you use to transact business.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 16

Chart of Accounts Structure


Chart of Accounts Structure
With Oracle General Ledger, you:
Define the account combinations to be used for
journal entry and budgeting
Define account hierarchies for reporting and
analysis

y
l
n

2-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 17

Accounting Calendar
Accounting Calendar
You need to create a calendar to define an accounting
year and the periods it contains.

y
l
n

2-17

Oracle General Ledger allows you to define multiple calendars and assign a
different calendar to each set of books. For example, you can use a monthly
calendar for one set of books, and a quarterly calendar for another.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 18

Unlimited Currencies
Unlimited Currencies
You can enable a variety of currencies to allow you to
enter transactions in multiple currencies.

Dollars

Francs

Yen

Pounds

y
l
n

2-18

You can enable predefined currencies or you can set up your own customized
currencies.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 19

Chart of Accounts Structure


Chart of Accounts Structure
Define a flexible chart of accounts structure:
Create up to 30 segments of up to 25 characters per
segment, limited to 240 characters total.
Define each segment name and the order in which it
appears.
Attach a list of valid values to each segment.

y
l
n

2-19

Examples
Manufacturing:
XX
XXX
XXXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
Company Cost Center Account
Product
Prod. Line Sub Acct.
News Distribution:
XX
XXXXXX
XX
XXX
XXXX
Division
Account
Region
Story
Distribution
Project Oriented:
XXX
XXXXX
XXX
XXXX
XX
Company Account
Department Project
Project Type
Suggestion: Tailor your account structure for your industry and reporting
requirements. Choose the number of segments, as well as the length, name, and
order of each segment.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 20

Creating Accounting Flexfields


Creating Accounting Flexfields
Perform the five steps necessary to create an
Accounting Flexfield.
1. Define a value set.
2. Define an Accounting Flexfield structure.
3. Define valid segment values.
4. Create account combinations.
5. Optionally, define security rules.

y
l
n

2-20

The above sequence needed to create Accounting Flexfields is the same sequence
needed to create all key flexfields.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 21

Defining Value Sets


Defining Value Sets
Use value sets to control the format and
characteristics of the Accounting Flexfield segment.
Value_
Set 2

Value_
Set 1

Value_
Set 3

Value_
Set 1

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Maximum
size: 2

Maximum
size: 3

Maximum
size: 4

Maximum
size: 2

Validation:
Independent

Validation:
Independent

Validation:
Table

Balancing Segment Cost Center

Natural
Account

Validation:
Independent

Intercompany
Segment

The same value set can be used more than once in


the same Accounting Flexfield structure.

y
l
n

2-21

Defining Value Sets


Value sets determine the attributes of your segments such as length, zero-fill,
right-justify, alphanumerics, and value security.
Value sets control what types of values can be used as Accounting Flexfield
segment values.
Assigning Value Sets to Segments
Assign one value set to each Accounting Flexfield segment.
Optionally, assign value sets to multiple Accounting Flexfield segments in
multiple Accounting Flexfield structures.
Share the same value sets across multiple sets of books to facilitate
consolidation.
You can use the same value set more than once within the same Accounting
Flexfield structure, as is the case with COAs created to use Intercompany
Segment Balancing.
Note: Changing the attributes of a value set affects all of the Accounting
Flexfield segments using that value set.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 22

How to Create Value Sets


How to Create Value Sets
Use the Value Sets window to define or review a value
set.

y
l
n

2-22

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Setting Up


General Ledger > Chart of Accounts > Defining Your Chart of
Accounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 23

Validation Types
Validation Types
When you define value sets, you also need to
determine how you want to validate your values.
Choose the appropriate validation type:
Independent
Dependent
Table Validated

y
l
n

2-23

Validation Types
Use Independent validation when the meaning of a value does not depend on the
value of another segment.
Use Dependent validation when the meaning of a value depends on the value of
another (independent) segment. The independent segment value determines the
acceptable dependent segment values.
Use Table validation when the valid values already exist in a database table.
Note: If you are validating your value set against a database table, you must
register the table with Oracle Application Object Library.
Note: The validation type of an existing value set cannot be changed.
Technical Note:
It is recommended to use the Independent validation type with Accounting
Flexfield segments. The Dependent validation type limits using parent values
with MassAllocations, MassBudgeting, and Financial Statement Generator
(FSG). The only parent value available for dependent segments is an all
inclusive parent that includes all the values of the value set. The parent value
cannot include a subset of child values, a common practice when using
summary accounts in mass allocations.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 24

Defining Value Sets


Defining Value Sets
Use value sets to control the format and
characteristics of the Accounting Flexfield segment.
Value_
Set 2

Value_
Set 1

Value_
Set 3

Value_
Set 1

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Format:
Char

Maximum
size: 2

Maximum
size: 3

Maximum
size: 4

Maximum
size: 2

Validation:
Independent

Validation:
Independent

Validation:
Table

Validation:
Independent

Balancing
Segment
01
02
03

Cost Center

Natural
Account
HEAD
1000
9999

Intercompany
Segment

100
101
999

01
02
03

Values are shared by the same value set.

y
l
n

2-24

Defining Value Sets


Value sets determine the attributes of your segments such as length, zero-fill,
right-justify, alphanumerics, and value security.
Value sets control what types of values can be used as Accounting Flexfield
segment values.
Assigning Value Sets to Segments
Assign one value set to each Accounting Flexfield segment.
Optionally, assign value sets to multiple Accounting Flexfield segments in
multiple Accounting Flexfield structures.
Share the same value sets across multiple sets of books to facilitate
consolidation.
You can use the same value set more than once within the same Accounting
Flexfield structure, as is the case with COAs created to use Intercompany
Segment Balancing.
Note: Changing the attributes of a value set affects all of the Accounting
Flexfield segments using that value set.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 25

Defining Segment Values


Defining Segment Values
For each parent value, you can:
Define child ranges
Define parent ranges
Move child ranges
Move parent ranges
View hierarchies

y
l
n

2-25

Define Child Ranges


Enter the ranges of child values for each parent.
Specify a range type of Child or Parent.
When using the Child type, any child values that fall within the specified
range are considered children of the parent value.
When using the Parent type, any parent values that fall within the specified
range are considered children of the parent value.
Move Child Ranges
Move a range of child values from one parent to another parent value.
If the child moved is also a parent, its children are moved automatically.
View Hierarchies
View the hierarchy structure to which the selected value belongs.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 26

Defining Segment Values


Defining Segment Values
Define parent/child relationships, including multilevel
hierarchies, to facilitate reporting and analysis.
Top-le vel
parent

Secondlevel
parents
Children

Western region

California

East
CA

Nevada

East
NV

West
CA

West
NV

Oregon

West
OR

East
OR

y
l
n

2-26

Child Segment Values


Post journals and enter budgets directly to child segment values. Assign ranges
of children to parents.
Parent Segment Values
Use parents to sum the balances of the associated children accounts. Any
segment that has children beneath iteven if that segment has its own parent
above itis considered a parent by Oracle General Ledger. The value T is
also a parent value even though its children are not specifically assigned.
You cannot post journals or enter budgets directly for parent segment values.
Assign ranges of child values to parent values to create summations for running
reports, MassAllocations, or MassBudgeting.
You can create parent segment values for independent segments, but there are
limitations when used with dependent segments. The Dependent validation type
limits using parent values with MassAllocations, MassBudgeting, and Financial
Statement Generator (FSG). The only parent value available for dependent
segments is an all inclusive parent that includes all the values of the value set.
Technical Note:
Oracle General Ledger treats all segment values that have the parent check box
enabled as parents, regardless whether it has children.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 27

Summary accounts may use the segment value T in one or more of the
segments, therefore, define the segment value T for every Accounting
Flexfield segment if you are planning to create summary accounts.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 28

Flexible Account Hierarchies


Flexible Account Hierarchies
Oracle General Ledger enables you to set up a variety
of flexible parent/child account hierarchies to match
your organizational needs.
Smart
Computers, Inc.

CPUs

Disk
drives

Smart
Computers, Inc.

Printers

New
York

Paris

Chicago

y
l
n

2-27

Multiple Hierarchies
Maintain multiple views of your account combinations.
Use various flexible parent/child account hierarchies to view your business
according to product lines, geographical regions, organizational lines, or any
other combination of factors you deem important.
Create your hierarchy with as many vertical and horizontal levels as you need to
effectively analyze your business or business segment.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 29

Using Dynamic Insertion


Using Dynamic Insertion
Dynamically create new account combinations while
you are entering data by enabling dynamic insertion in
the Key Flexfields Segments window.
Dynamic insertion can be enabled or disabled at any
time.
All new combinations must satisfy all defined crossvalidation rules before they are created.

y
l
n

2-28

Frequently, companies enable dynamic insertion while they are entering


historical data from a legacy system; they then disable the feature to ensure
tighter control over the creation of new account combinations.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 30

Defining Flexfield Security Rules


Defining Flexfield Security Rules
Restrict a responsibility's data entry and online
inquiry to specific values by using flexfield security
rules.
Account Segment
Include

#s 0000 to 9999

Exclude

#s 1000 to 3999

Available
Values

0000 to 0999

Unavailable
Values

4000 to 9999

1000 to 3999

y
l
n

2-29

Segment Values
You can prohibit all users from accessing specific values by disabling the values
in the segment Values window.
To prohibit certain users from accessing specific values, you can define
flexfield security rules and assign those rules to the responsibility of the
restricted users.
Accounting Flexfield segment values must pass every assigned flexfield
security rule for that responsibility to be valid.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 31

Defining Cross-Validation Rules


Defining Cross-Validation Rules
Prohibit creation of invalid account combinations
using cross-validation rules.
Use cross-validation rules in combination with
dynamic insertion.
Define cross-validation rules before entering a chart
of accounts.

y
l
n

2-30

Combinations of Segment Values


New accounts must pass every enabled cross-validation rule to be valid.
Cross-validation rules do not affect existing accounts.
Dynamic Insertion
Enable dynamic insertion in the Key Flexfield Segments window to allow users
to define new account combinations of segment values.
If dynamic insertion is not enabled, you can only enter new account
combinations of segment values using the GL Accounts window.
Defining and Revising Cross-Validation Rules
Because cross-validation rules validate only new accounts, you should define
and enable them prior to entering accounts.
Revise cross-validation rules at any time, but remember that they only prevent
the creation of new invalid account combinations.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 32

Set of Books Options - Multiple Reporting Currencies


Set of Books Options - Multiple Reporting
Currencies
If you need to report in multiple currencies at the
balance level, as well as transactions level, define a
primary set of books using your functional currency
and additional reporting sets of books using your
reporting currencies.
Primary Set of Books- Choose this option if you are
defining a primary set of books.
Reporting Set of Books - Choose this option if you
are defining a reporting set of books.
Not Applicable - Choose this option if you are not
using Multiple Reporting Currencies.

y
l
n

2-31

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Setting Up


General Ledger > Defining Sets of Books > Defining Sets of Books

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 33

Creating a Set of Books Considerations


Creating a Set of Books Considerations
You must create a set of books for each entity that has
a unique combination of currency, calendar and chart
of accounts. Required steps include:
Defining Accounting Flexfields, including defining
value sets, segments, and segment values
Defining calendar period types and calendar periods
Enabling and defining currencies
Defining your set of books and assigning it to a
responsibility

y
l
n

2-32

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 34

Sharing a Set of Books Across Oracle Applications


Sharing a Set of Books Across
Oracle Applications
Many elements of an Oracle General Ledger set of
books are shared with other Oracle applications.
Account Structure
Value sets
Segment values
Security rules
Cross validation rules

Accounting Calendar
Periods
Period types

Currencies

y
l
n

2-33

The implementation choices made in setting up Oracle General Ledger will


affect many other Oracle applications.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 35

Accounting Flexfield Considerations


Accounting Flexfield Considerations

Identifying business requirements


Analyzing reporting requirements
Creating a worldwide charts of accounts
Creating vertical structures
Using independent and dependent segments
Designing size and segment numbering schemes
Sequencing the segments
Using dynamic insertion and cross validation rules
Using security rules

y
l
n

2-34

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 36

Identifying Business Requirements


Identifying Business Requirements
Identify the aspects of your business that you need to
track and analyze; pay specific attention to aspects
that span several applications. Examples include:
Company, legal entity, fund
Division, region, territory, state, country
Location, plant, office, store
Cost center, department, function
Natural Account categories under asset, liability,
owners equity, revenue and expense types.
Product, product line, line of business, channel
Project, phase, task, job, work order

y
l
n

2-35

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 37

Identifying Business Requirements


Identifying Business Requirements
Assign each item type as a separate segment.
Avoid having more than one meaning for each
segment.

Product &
Company
XXX

Region
XX

Project
XXXX

y
l
n

2-36

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 38

Analyzing Reporting Requirements


Analyzing Reporting Requirements
Make certain that you can generate the required
reports based on the segments in your Accounting
Flexfield.
Company
Region
Cost Center
Project

y
l
n

2-37

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 39

Creating a Worldwide Chart of Accounts


Creating a Worldwide Chart of Accounts
Many companies need to use a unified chart of
accounts, but also need to capture different
information in different sites and countries based on
business needs and statutory requirements.

Consolidating
segments
(HQ control)
Nonconsolidating
segments
(Local control)

y
l
n

2-38

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 40

Creating Vertical Structures


Creating Vertical Structures
Avoid creating unneeded segments.
Track structures such as division-region-office in a
single segment by using a vertical Accounting
Flexfield.
Example: Use Company-Office-Account instead of
Company-Divi sion-Region-Office-Account.
Division

Division parent

Region

Region parent

Posting level

Company

Office

Account

y
l
n

2-39

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 41

Using Independent and Dependent Segments


Using Independent and
Dependent Segments
Independent Segment

Dependent Segment

Segment that has


meaning on its own
without depending on
other segment values

Segment that is linked to


an independent segment

Example
Account:
1100
Subaccount: 001 Desc: Cash-Citibank

Example
Company: 01

Account:
2200
Subaccount: 001 Desc: Debt-B of A

y
l
n

2-40

Avoid using the Dependent validation type with the Accounting Flexfield
segments; it complicates parent/child hierarchies and limits the ability to use
parent values with reporting and some formula-based journal entries.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 42

Designing Size and Segment Numbering Schemes


Designing Size and Segment Numbering
Schemes
Decide whether to allow alphabetical characters in
Accounting Flexfield value sets.
Decide on the size of the Accounting Flexfield
segments.
Do not de sign the segments longer than needed.
Consider your organization's growth requirements.

Design the coding schema for your Accounting


Flexfield values.
Consider revi sing your existing coding schemas to
leverage features in the Accounting flexfield structure.

y
l
n

2-41

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 43

Sequencing the Segments


Sequencing the Segments
Consider the efficiency of data entry and a logical
order for users when deciding how to order your
Accounting Flexfield segments.
Place segments with defaults at the beginning or
end of your Accounting Flexfield.
Several reports in Oracle General Ledger sort in the
following order:
Balancing segment
Account segment
Remaining segments from left to right

y
l
n

2-42

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 44

Using Dynamic Insertion and Cross Validation Rules


Using Dynamic Insertion and Cross
Validation Rules
Allow dynamic insertion if you want users to create
new combinations from windows that do not use
your combinations table.
You should prevent dynamic inserts if you want all
new valid combinations entered only from the GL
Accounts window.
If dynamic insertion is allowed, consider using
cross-validation rules to prevent the creation of
combinations that should never exist (combinations
with values that should not coexist in the same
combination).

y
l
n

2-43

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 45

Using Flexfield Security Rules


Using Flexfield Security Rules
Flexfield Security Rules restrict access to
Accounting Flexfield segment values based on
responsibility.
Use the Define Flexfield Security Rules window to
define security rules at any time.
Once you define your rule, you must assign your
rule to a responsibility.
You may define rules for a segment that does not
have security enabled, but your rule has no effect
until you enable security for that segment and
assign your rule to a responsibility.
Flexfield security rules for the Accounting Flexfield
restrict all data entry, query access and FSG
(Financial Statement Generator) reporting to certain
segment values.

y
l
n

2-44

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 46

Summary Accounts
Summary Accounts
Summary accounts store the sum of the balances of
groups of detail accounts.
Summary Revenue Account.15,000

Detailed Revenue Account A..10,000

Detailed Revenue Account B.3,000

Detailed Revenue Account C.2,000

y
l
n

2-45

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Setting Up


General Ledger > Defining Summary Accounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 47

Detail vs Summary Accounts


Detail vs Summary Accounts
Detail Accounts:
allow direct posting of busi ness transactions and
journals.

Summary Accounts:
are updated when journals are posted to a
corre sponding detail account.
enable online summary inquiries, including account
inquiry on the detail accounts that compose the
summary amount.
speed concurrent processi ng, eliminating the need to
sum the account balances of groups of detail accounts
during runtime.

y
l
n

2-46

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 48

Summary and Parent Accounts


Summary and Parent Accounts
Summary accounts differ from parent accounts in
several important ways:
Storage of account balances
Posting process
Online inquiries
Financial Statement Generator
Recurring journals and budget formulas
MassAllocation

y
l
n

2-47

Summary Accounts
Store Summary Balances
View Balances online
Use in recurring journals or budget formulas
Use the constant segment type in MassAllocations
Get quicker FSG reporting because no summations are required
Require posting to additional accounts because balances must be updated each
time journals are posted to one of the corresponding detail accounts
Parent Accounts
Do not store account balances
Cannot be viewed online because they do not maintain balances
Cannot be used in recurring journals or budget formulas because they do not
maintain balances
Use the looping segment or summing segment types in MassAllocations
Result in slower FSG reporting because summations are required
Expedite the posting process because summary balances do not have to be
updated each time journals are posted

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 49

Defining Shorthand Aliases


Defining Shorthand Aliases
A shorthand alias is a simple code you create that
represents a partial or complete account combination.
Use shorthand aliases to reduce account-entry
keystrokes and to maximize accuracy.
Account
Combination

Shorthand Alias

01-110-000-1110-000-0000

Cash01

NY
Sales

-320- - - 01 - -420-4110- -

Computer Monitors

- - - -310-

NY Monitor Sales

01-320-420-4110-310-0000

y
l
n

2-48

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 50

Defining Units of Measure


Defining Units of Measure
You can associate statistical amounts with monetary
amounts using statistical units of measure. This
allows you to enter both monetary and statistical
amounts in a single journal line.

New York Consulting Revenue Dollars and Hours


Dr. 04.420.430.4310.000.000: ...$10,000.50 Hours

y
l
n

2-49

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 51

Average Balancing
Average Balancing
You can use average balance processing for your set
of books. Once you enable this option, General Ledger
automatically stores the aggregate balances that are
used to calculate average and end of day balances.

y
l
n

2-50

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Setting Up General Ledger > Defining Sets of Books > Set of Books
Standard Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 52

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-51

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 53

Overview
Overview
General Ledger supports a variety of journal entry
types to meet your business and accounting
requirements.
In General Ledger, there are four basic journal entry
types. Each journal entry type has expanded
functionality we will explore in this and the
automated journal processing module.

y
l
n

2-52

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 54

Journal Entry Types


Journal Entry Types
Used for most accounting transactions.
Examples include Re venues, Expenses,
Adjustments, and Reclassifications
Basic
Journal Entry
Created by reversing an existing journal
entry. You can reverse any journal entr y
and post it to the current or any future
open accounting period.
Reversing
Journal Entry

y
l
n

2-53

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Journal


Entry

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 55

Journal Entry Types


Journal Entry Types
Defined once then generated for each
subsequent accounting period. You can use
recurring journal entries to define automatic
consolidating and eliminating entries.
Recurring
Entries
Journal entries that utilize a single journal
entry formula to allocate revenues and
expenses across a group of cost centers,
departments, divisions, and so on.
Mass
Allocations

y
l
n

2-54

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 56

Journal Creation Methods


Journal Creation Methods

Manual
Entries

Create adjusting journals


and accruals

Enter debits and credits


manually

Reversing
Entries

Reverse an error, revaluation,


encumbrance journal, and
accruals

Reverse the journal amounts


of a preexisting entry

Recurring
Entries

Create journals using fixed


accounts and amounts and
complex formulas. Create
multiple journals with the
same/sim ilar information.

Create journals using a


skeleton template, standard
template, or formula

Mass
Allocate from one account to
Allocations many using a single formula

Calculate journals using an


allocation formula

y
l
n

2-55

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 57

Journal Creation Methods


Journal Creation Methods

Journal Wizard

Journal Import

Integrate
General Ledger
with an Excel
Spreadsheet for
journal creation

Upload journal
entries from an
Excel spreadsheet

Integrate General
Ledger with other
applications

Import journal
information from
feeder systems

y
l
n

2-56

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 58

Accounting Calendar
Accounting Calendar
You cannot enter or post journals
Never
Opened
You can enter journals, but you cannot post.
The number of future enterable periods is a
fixed number defined in the Set of Books
window.

Future
Enterable

You can enter and post journals to any open


period. An unlimited number of periods can be
open, but doing so may slow the posting
process.

Open
Period

y
l
n

2-57

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 59

Accounting Calendar
Accounting Calendar

You must reopen Closed periods before you


can post journals. You should manually close
periods after finishing your month-end
processing.

Closed
Period

Permanently closed periods cannot be


reopened.
Do not use this status if you want to have your
Permanently records auditable in future years.
Closed Period
This status is required to archive and purge
data.

y
l
n

2-58

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 60

Posting Journals
Posting Journals
You have several ways to post journal batches:
Use the Post Journals window to select and post
several journal batches
Use the More Actions window to post a journal
batch directly
Use the AutoPost program to periodically post
journal batches

y
l
n

2-59

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Journal


Entry > Posting Journals

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 61

Drilling Down to Journal Detail


Drilling Down to Journal Detail
Perform an Account Inquiry, and drill down to review
detailed information about:
journals you entered in General Ledger
journals you imported from Oracle Payables,
Receivables, and other subledgers.
Account inquiry

Drill down

Subledger detail

y
l
n

2-60

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 62

T-Accounts
T-Accounts
Operations - Machinery and Equipment
USD

USD

5,000

5,000

Operations - Asset Clearing


USD

USD

5,000

5,000

You can view General Ledger journals or subledger


accounting entries in a graphical T-account format.

y
l
n

2-61

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 63

Demonstration
Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to:
Create and post a journal batch
Perform an account inquiry

y
l
n

2-62

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 64

Importing Journal Entries: Overview


Importing Journal Entries: Overview
Create journals in feeder systems, upload them to the
GL_INTERFACE table and use Journal Import to create
journals in General Ledger.
Summary or detail

GL_INTERFACE

Subledgers

Automatic or manual

Journal Import

Post

GL_BALANCES

GL_JE_LINES
GL_JE_HEADERS
GL_JE_BATCHES

y
l
n

2-63

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 65

Recurring Journals: Overview


Recurring Journals: Overview
There are three major types of recurring journals.
Skeleton
Dr.
Cr.

Temporary Labor<No Amount>


Salaries Payable..<No Amount>

Standard
Dr.
Cr.

Auto Lease Expense. . . .<Constant Amount>


Accounts Payable..<Constant Amount>

Formula
Dr.
Cr.

Rent Expense. . . .<Variable Amount>


Rent Payable..<Variable Amount>

y
l
n

2-64

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 66

MassAllocations: Overview
MassAllocations: Overview
MassAllocations: A single journal entry formula that
allocates revenues and expenses across a group of
cost centers, departments, divisions, and so on.
Total rent

1/3

1/3

1/3

Tokyo rent

Paris rent
Chicago rent

y
l
n

2-65

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Journal


Entry > MassAllocations

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 67

Defining MassAllocation Formulas


Defining MassAllocation Formulas
Create MassAllocation formulas.
All MassAllocation formulas use the following
equation to determine allocation amounts:
Cost Pool * (Usage Factor/Total Usage)

Oracle General Ledger uses the following format to


represent the equation. Each factor in this equation
relates to a separate formula line:
A * B/C

You can enter any combination of fixed amounts


and account combinations in formula lines A, B, or
C.

y
l
n

2-66

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > General Ledger > Journal


Entry > MassAllocations

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 68

Overview of the Period Closing Process


Overview of the Period Closing Process

Enter, import,
generate, reverse
and post journal
entries

Run revaluation
and translation

Consolidate
your sets of
books

Analyze the results

Run period end


reports

Close the
current period

y
l
n

2-67

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 69

Year-End Closing Journals


Year-End Closing Journals
General Ledger provides year-end closing journals so
you can pre-determine the effect of the close (a "soft
close") and perform pro-forma reporting.
During the soft close process, General Ledger can
create two types of closing journals.
The first journal closes all of the income statement
accounts.
General Ledger can also generate a balance sheet
closing journal (for globalization requirements),
which posts all asset and liability balances to a
closing account you specify.

y
l
n

2-68

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Journal Entry > Year-End Closing Journals
Closing journals can be run for any period, not just during the year end period.
Some companies go through the closing journal process even when it is not their
year end.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 70

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-69

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 71

Overview of Intercompany Accounting


Overview of Intercompany Accounting
If your organization has multiple companies within a
single set of books, you can use intercompany
accounting to track transactions between companies.
Set up your parent balancing segment value to include
subsidiary and eliminating balancing segments.
Acme Corporation
99
99

North America 01

Single set of
books

Eliminating
Company 08

Europe 04

Asia 06

y
l
n

2-70

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger > MultiCompany -Single Set of Books > Overview

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 72

Overview of Intercompany Journals


Overview of Intercompany Journals
You can balance intercompany journals based on
multiple parameters including Journal source,
Journal category, and Balancing segment value.
You can specify unique due-to and due-from
intercompany accounts or templates for Oracle
General Ledger to use to balance intercompany
journal entries automatically.
Based on the rules that you define, Oracle General
Ledger inserts additional journal lines to offset
journal lines that cross balancing segments.

y
l
n

2-71

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 73

Overview of Segment Qualifiers


Overview of Segment Qualifiers
In Release 11i, there are four types of segment
qualifiers:
Balancing
Natural Account
Cost Center
Intercompany
The intercompany segment shares the same value set
as the balancing segment and is used in account
combinations that General Ledger creates to balance
intercompany journals.

y
l
n

2-72

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 74

Intercompany Balancing Within a Single Set of Books


Intercompany Balancing Within a Single
Set of Books
You can balance intercompany journals based on
multiple parameters, including:
Journal Source
Journal Category
Balancing segment value

y
l
n

2-73

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger > MultiCompany -Single Set of Books > Overview

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 75

Intercompany Balancing Within a Single Set of Books


(continued)
Intercompany Balancing Within a Single
Set of Books (continued)
For each combination of the three parameters, you can
specify a unique intercompany account or template for
General Ledger to use to balance intercompany
journals automatically.
Based on rules you define, General Ledger inserts
additional journal lines during posting to offset
journal lines that cross balancing segments.
Your rules may also include different accounts
based on whether the balancing amount should be
posted to a credit account (due to) or a debit
account (due from).

y
l
n

2-74

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 76

Intercompany Balancing Within a Single Set of Books


(continued)
Intercompany Balancing Within a Single
Set of Books (continued)
At the journal source and category level, you can
choose a default clearing company against which all
trading partners balance.
You can also specify whether intercompany journal
balancing is performed at a summarized level for
each trading partner or at a journal line level

y
l
n

2-75

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 77

Intercompany Balancing Options


Intercompany Balancing Options
General Ledger offers the following solutions to
account for intercompany transactions:
Standard intercompany balancing - create generic
balancing lines against the intercompany accounts
that you have defined for specific sources and
categories. This method does not track payable and
receivable balances by trading subsidiaries.
This method is similar to intercompany balancing
functionality in General Ledger, Release 11.0.

y
l
n

2-76

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger > MultiCompany -Single Set of Books > Intercompany Accounting

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 78

Standard Intercompany Balancing Example


Standard Intercompany Balancing
Example
You define the following intercompany accounts for a
specific source and category:
xx.000.1600.000 intercompany receivables
xx.000.2600.000 intercompany payables

You post the following transaction using the same


source and category to transfer an asset from
company 01 to companies 02 and 03:
debit credit
02.000.1725.000
300
03.000.1725.000
400
01.000.1725.000
700

y
l
n

2-77

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 79

Standard Intercompany Balancing Example (continued)


Standard Intercompany Balancing
Example (continued)
General Ledger creates the following journal lines to
record intercompany receivable for company 01 and
payables for companies 02 and 03.
debit credit
01.000.1600.000
700
02.000.2600.000
300
03.000.2600.000
400

y
l
n

2-78

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 80

Intercompany Balancing Options


Intercompany Balancing Options
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing - define separate
intercompany accounts to record more detail for your
intercompany journals and track intercompany
balances.

y
l
n

2-79

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 81

Enhanced Intercompany Balancing Example


Enhanced Intercompany Balancing
Example
You define the following accounts:
Receivables xx.000.1601.000
due
xx.000.1602.000
due
xx.000.1603.000
due
xx.000.1600.000
due
Payables

xx.000.2601.000
xx.000.2602.000
xx.000.2603.000
xx.000.2600.000

due
due
due
due

from comp 01
from comp 02
from comp 03
from Other
to comp 01
to comp 02
to comp 03
to Other

y
l
n

2-80

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 82

Enhanced Intercompany Balancing Example


(continued)
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing
Example (continued)
You post the following transaction:
debit credit
02.000.1725.000
300
03.000.1725.000
400
01.00.1725.000
700
General Ledger creates the following journal lines:
debit credit
01.000.1602.000
300
01.000.1603.000
400
02.000.2601.000
300
03.000.2601.000
400
2-81

This method illustrates that:


Company 01 has intercompany receivables of 700
300 from company 02
400 from company 03

I
A
O

s
U

Company 02 has an intercompany payable to company 1 of 300


Company 03 has an intercompany payable to company 1 of 400

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 83

O
e

y
l
n

Intercompany Balancing Options


Intercompany Balancing Options
Intercompany Segment Balancing - use the
intercompany segment in your chart of accounts to
record the same detail as enhanced intercompany
accounting.

y
l
n

2-82

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 84

Intercompany Segment Balancing Example


Intercompany Segment Balancing
Example
Assume your chart of accounts has the following
structure:
CO-CC-ACCT-IC where:
CO is the balancing segment
CC is the cost center segment
ACCT is the natural account segment
IC is the intercompany segment
You define the following accounts:
xx.000.1600.00 intercompany receivables
xx.000.2600.00 intercompany payables

y
l
n

2-83

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 85

Intercompany Segment Balancing Example (continued)


Intercompany Segment Balancing
Example (continued)
You post the following transactions:
debit credit
02.000.1725.00
300
03.000.1725.00
400
01.000.1725.00
700
General Ledger creates the following journal lines:
debit credit
01.000.1600.02
300
01.000.1600.03
400
02.000.2600.01
300
03.000.2600.01
400

y
l
n

2-84

The results of this transaction indicate:


Company 01 has intercompany receivables of 700
300 from company 02
400 from company 03

I
A
O

s
U

Company 02 has an intercompany payable to company 1 of 300


Company 03 has an intercompany payable to company 1 of 400

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 86

O
e

Intercompany Balancing Options


Intercompany Balancing Options
Clearing companies - designate one company to act
as the trading partner for all subsidiary companies
in the organization for certain types of
intercompany transactions.
You can set up clearing companies using enhanced
intercompany accounting or using the
Intercompany Segment.

y
l
n

2-85

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 87

Clearing Company Example Enhanced Intercompany


Balancing
Clearing Company Example
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing
You define the following accounts:
Receivables xx.000.1601.000
due
xx.000.1602.000
due
xx.000.1603.000
due
xx.000.1604.000
due
xx.000.1600.000
due
Payables

xx.000.2601.000
xx.000.2602.000
xx.000.2603.000
xx.000.2604.000
xx.000.2600.000

due
due
due
due
due

from comp 01
from comp 02
from comp 03
from comp 04
from All Other
to comp 01
to comp 02
to comp 03
to comp 04
to All Other

2-86

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

y
l
n

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 88

Clearing Company Example Enhanced Intercompany


Balancing (cont)
Clearing Company Example
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing (cont)
Complete the following in the Intercompany Accounts
window:
Source: Accounts Payable
Category: Your choice
Clearing Company Usage tab: Always Use Clearing
Company
Default Options tab: Use Default Clearing Company
Enter 04 as the default clearing company.

y
l
n

2-87

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 89

Clearing Company Example Enhanced Intercompany


Balancing (cont)
Clearing Company Example
Enhanced Intercompany Balancing (cont)
You post the following transaction:
debit
02.000.1725.000
300
03.000.1725.000
400
01.000.1725.000

credit

700

General Ledger creates the following journal lines:


04.000.1602.000

debit
300

04.000.1603.000
400
01.000.1604.000
700
02.000.2604.000
03.000.2604.400
04.000.2601.000

credit

300
400
700

y
l
n

2-88

The results tell us that:


Company 01 has intercompany receivables of 700
300 from company 2
400 from company 3

I
A
O

O
e

s
U

Company 02 has an intercompany payable to company 01 of 300


Company 03 has an intercompany payable to company 01 of 400

&
l
a

n
r
te

Companies 1 through 4 balance against the originating company, 04.

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 90

Clearing Company Example using the Intercompany


Segment
Clearing Company Example
using the Intercompany Segment
The intercompany balancing segment is enabled in
your chart of accounts.
Complete the following in the Intercompany Accounts
window:
Source: Accounts Payable
Category: Your choice
Balance by Detail: Balance by journal line
Clearing Company Usage tab: Many to Many

y
l
n

2-89

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 91

Clearing Company Example Using the Intercompany


Segment (cont)
Clearing Company Example
Using the Intercompany Segment (cont)
Default Options tab: Use Default Clearing Company
Specify Default Clearing Company as Company 06.
Balancing Segment Column: Press the tab key. All
Other is displayed. All Other includes all balancing
segments not defined in this column.
Due To and Due From columns:
Due From: 01.000.1600.00 to specify a debit entry
Due To:
01.000.2600.00 to specify a credit entry

y
l
n

2-90

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 92

Clearing Company Example Using the Intercompany


Segment (cont)
Clearing Company Example
Using the Intercompany Segment (cont)
You create and post the following entries:
debit credit
02.000.5300.00
500
03.000.2400.00
100
04.000.3500.00
300
01.000.1000.00
700
05.000.1000.00
200

y
l
n

2-91

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 93

Clearing Company Example Using the Intercompany


Segment (cont)
Clearing Company Example
Using the Intercompany Segment (cont)
General Ledger automatically creates these additional
balancing entries with the following account code
combinations:
debit credit
06.000.1600.02
06.000.1600.03
06.000.1600.04
01.000.1600.06
05.000.1600.06
02.000.2600.06
03.000.2600.06
04.000.2600.06
06.000.2600.01
06.000.2600.05

500
100
300
700
200
500
100
300
700
200

y
l
n

2-92

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 94

Implementation Considerations for Intercompany


Balancing
Implementation Considerations for
Intercompany Balancing
Can you take advantage of using an intercompany
segment in your chart of accounts and maximize the
benefit of using enhanced intercompany balancing?
Which one of the intercompany balancing options
would work in your organization?
Can you use a clearing company to clear
intercompany transactions?

y
l
n

2-93

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 95

Overview of Global Intercompany System


Overview of Global Intercompany System
With Global Intercompany System (GIS), you can
monitor manual and automated intercompany
transactions centrally.
Ensure that both parties to an intercompany
transaction review the transaction details.
Ensure that intercompany journal entries are made
in both subsidiarys sets of books, to the correct
intercompany accounts.
Simplify the intercompany reconciliation process by
ensuring that transaction amounts made to
reciprocal intercompany accounts are the same.

y
l
n

2-94

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 96

Global Intercompany System (GIS)


Global Intercompany System (GIS)
GIS provides a controlled, central location for
subsidiaries to conduct intercompany transactions
throughout a global organization.
Transactions between subsidiary companies are
entered, exchanged, and resolved (if disagreements
occur) within GIS.
Oracle Workflow operates in conjunction with GIS to
notify parties of entered transactions, rejections,
approvals, and transaction results.
Once all parties are satisfied with GIS transactions,
the transactions are transferred to each subsidiary
companys set of books and posted.

y
l
n

2-95

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 97

GIS Implementation
GIS Implementation
Consider the following for your imple mentation:
Remote instances using a Corporate Standard Chart
of Accounts.
If your subsidiaries use a uniform chart of accounts
for reporting and consolidating financial data, apply
the same chart of accounts to GIS. Subsidiaries, the
parent and GIS can operate from a variety of remote
instance configurations.

y
l
n

2-96

It is recommended that you set up a Corporate Standard Chart of Accounts.


Each subsidiary uses the same chart of accounts within GIS to exchange
transactions. Subsidiaries can simply transfer and post transaction results to
their set of books outside of GIS.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 98

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-97

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 99

Concepts You Should Know


Concepts You Should Know
Multiple Sets of Books

MRC Sets of Books


Enter
transactions in
primary book
Reporting
books

Transactions must be
entered, revalued, and
translated separately in
each set of books.

Transactions entered in
primary books are
automatically converted to
each reporting set of books.

y
l
n

2-98

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Multi-Currency
Set of Books
Before you begin this unit, you should be aware of some concepts regarding sets
of books. A set of books consists of the following elements: an accounting
calendar, an account structure, and currency. If one of these elements is
different, you must create a separate set of books.
Multiple Reporting Set of Books
Multiple Reporting Currencies (MRC). MRC is beneficial for companies who
must regularly and routinely report its transactions and financial results in
multiple currencies, other than its primary functional currency. With MRC, you
create a primary set of books and then associate one or more reporting sets of
books (with different currencies) to that primary set of books. Day-to-day
transactions are entered in the primary set of books where they are converted to
the designated currencies for the reporting sets of books.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 100

Working with Multiple Currencies


Working with Multiple Currencies
JE 126

Update Daily
Conversion Rates
11 USD
USD == 7.1
7.1 BEF
BEF
11 USD
USD == 20
20 ITL
ITL
11 USD
USD == 1.5
1.5 AUD
AUD

Revalue Asset and


Liability Accounts

JE 125
Foreig
n
Currency
Foreig n
____
____
Currency
____
____
____ ____
____
__
_______ ____
____ __ __

Enter, Import and Post


Foreign Currency J Es
Translate Foreign
Currency Account
Balances

JE 126
ForeigJE
n 125
Currency
DR. AR 1000
____ ____

Post
Revaluation
Journals

CR. GA IN/LO S S
____ ____
1000
____ __ ___
DR. AP 500
CR GAIN /LO SS
500

Review Entered,
Converted, and
Translated Currency
Balances

Run Foreign Currency Trial


Balance Reports and
Produce Foreign Currency
Financial Statements

y
l
n

2-99

Working with Multiple Currencies


Update your daily conversion rates regularly.
Enter, import, and post foreign currency journals.
Revalue asset and liability accounts whose balances are denominated in a
foreign currency.
Post the revaluation journal batch to adjust your unrealized gain/loss
account for exchange rate fluctuations.
Translate account balances before consolidating sets of books with different
functional currencies, or to report account balances in an alternate currency.
Review entered, converted, and translated currency balances.
Run foreign currency Trial Balance reports.
Produce foreign currency financial statements.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 101

Foreign Currency Concepts


Foreign Currency Concepts
There are three key concepts in Oracle General Ledger
that pertain to foreign currency:
Conversion

Revaluation

Translation

y
l
n

2-100

Conversion
Conversion refers to foreign currency transactions that are immediately
converted at the time of entry to the functional currency of the set of books in
which the transaction takes place.
Revaluation
Revaluation adjusts liability or asset accounts that may be understated or
overstated at the end of a period due to a significant fluctuation in the exchange
rate between the time the transaction was entered and the end of the period. It
restates balances using proper period end rate.
Translation
Translation refers to the act of restating an entire set of books or balances for a
company from the functional currency to a foreign currency.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 102

Integrating with Subledgers


Integrating with Subledgers
Many foreign-denominated transactions are originally
entered in feeder systems such as Oracle Payables
and Oracle Receivables, then settled in the feeder
system.

Foreign currency
obligation is
entered in Oracle
Payables.

Foreign currency
obligation is paid
in Oracle Payables.

Payables journal
entry is recorded in
Oracle General Ledger.

Foreign currency
conversion,
revaluation, and
unrealized gain or
loss is recorded.

Realized foreign
currency
gain or loss is
calculated.

Payables journal
entry is recorded
in Oracle General
Ledger.

y
l
n

2-101

Foreign Currency Transactions from Subledgers


Each subledger handles foreign currency conversion differently, depending
upon the applications system options and the rate type.
Companies should implement procedures for users entering exchange rates
online to avoid inconsistencies in rates between applications. The procedures for
entry and maintenance of exchange rates should be addressed by a joint team of
all affected applications.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 103

Defining and Enabling Currencies


Defining and Enabling Currencies
Oracle Applications has predefined all currencies
specified in ISO standard #4217.
U.S. Dollars (USD) is the only currency that is
enabled initially.
To use a currency other than U.S. Dollars (USD), you
must enable the currency.
Use the Currencies window to define non-ISO
(International Standards Organization) currencies,
and to enable/disable currencies.

y
l
n

2-102

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Multi-Currency > Defining Currencies

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 104

Predefined Daily Conversion Rate Types


Predefined Daily Conversion Rate Types
RateType

Description

Spot

An exchange rate used to perform


conversion based on the rate on a specific
date.

Corporate

An exchange rate used to standardize rates


for your company.

User

An exchange rate you specify when you


enter a foreign currency journal entry.

EMU Fixed
Rate

An exchange rate General Ledger provides


automatically when you enter journals (after
the EMU effective starting date) when
translating values from one EMU currency to
another.

y
l
n

2-103

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Multi-Currency > Defining Conversion Rate
Types
You can use these predefined rate types to enter exchange rates, or you can
define additional conversion rate types. After defining a conversion rate type,
enter daily rates using that rate type.
Use conversion rate types to automatically assign a rate when you convert
foreign currency journal amounts to functional currency equivalents. When you
enter a foreign currency journal, General Ledger automatically displays the
predefined exchange rate based on the currency, rate type (unless you are using
the User rate type), and conversion date you enter.
The only rate type reserved for use by Oracle Financials is the User Rate Type.
User rates are directly entered by the user at the time transactions are entered.
Corporate and Spot Rate Types have no specific meaning within the system and
are provided as seed data because they are terms commonly used in the
workplace. Spot and Corporate rates are generated from a table.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 105

What is Multiple Reporting Currencies?


What is Multiple Reporting Currencies?
A set of unique features in Oracle Applications that
allow organizations to report and maintain
accounting records:
At the transaction level
In more than one functional currency

Multiple Reporting Currencies (MRC) benefits those


organizations that must routinely report their
transactions and financial results in multiple
currencies, other than their primary functional
currency.

y
l
n

2-104

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Multiple Reporting Currencies > Overview

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 106

Products Supporting MRC


Products Supporting MRC

Oracle General Ledger


Oracle Receivables
Oracle Payables
Oracle Projects
Oracle Assets
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Global Accounting Engine

y
l
n

2-105

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Multiple Reporting Currencies > Overview
Oracle Inventory and Oracle Cash Management also support MRC, though
indirectly, through their interaction with Oracle Receivables and Oracle
Payables.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 107

When Do You Use MRC?


When Do You Use MRC?
When your organization must regularly and
routinely support statutory and legal reporting of
both transactions and GL account balances in
multiple reporting currencies, other than the primary
functional currency
When any of these conditions exist:
operate in a country that is part of the European
Economic and Monetary Union
operate in a country whose unstable currency makes it
unsuitable for managing your business
need to report in a common functional currency other
than the transaction currency or your primary
functional currency

y
l
n

2-106

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Multiple Reporting Currencies > Overview > When to Use MRC

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 108

Multiple Sets of Books Primary and Reporting


Multiple Sets of Books
Primary and Reporting
One primary set of books (PSOB)
Use s your primary functional currency

One or more reporting sets of books (RSOB)


Each using a reporting functional currency
Each assigned to the primary set of books

y
l
n

2-107

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Multiple Reporting Currencies > Overview > MRC Features

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 109

Planning Your MRC Implementation


Planning Your MRC Implementation
Effort varies by installation type
Fresh Install & Upgrade Scenario One: moderate
planning and preparation effort
Upgrade scenario two: extensive planning,
preparation, and coordination effort

Important consideration for all installation types


Choosing your MRC starting dates

y
l
n

2-108

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 110

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-109

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 111

Overview of Consolidations
Overview of Consolidations
With Oracle General Ledger, you can consolidate any
number of subsidiaries into parents represented by
different sets of bookseven those with different
charts of accounts, currencies and calendars.
Subsidiary 1:
Company A
Company B

Subsidiary 2:
Company C

Subsidiary 3:
Company D
Company E
Company F

Run Consolidation
Parent:
Company A
Company B
Company C
Company D
Company E
Company F

y
l
n

2-110

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Global Consolidation System > What You Can Consolidate
With Oracle General Ledger, you can:
Consolidate the results of multiple organizations, with different sets of
books, currencies, calendars, and charts of accounts
Initiate consolidations from your parent or subsidiary General Ledgers.
Consolidate actual amounts as well as budget amounts.
Consolidate account balances or transactions.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 112

Consolidation Workbench
Consolidation Workbench
The Consolidation Workbench and State Controller
provide a central point of control for consolidating an
unlimited number of subsidiaries to your parent.
Use the State Controller to:
Access parent and subsidiary consolidation steps
from one window
Monitor the state of the consolidation process
View consolidation mappings and hierarchies

y
l
n

2-111

The Consolidation Workbench allows you to control several discrete


consolidation steps from a single window. From the Consolidation Workbench
you can access the State Controller, which is a navigation tool to guide you
through the consolidation process and access the windows you need to complete
the consolidation.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 113

Steps to Perform Consolidations


Steps to Perform Consolidations
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 5:
Step 6:
Step 7:

Map consolidation data.


Prepare consolidation data.
Transfer consolidation data.
Review and post consolidation journal
entries.
Generate and review eliminating entries.
Report on consolidated balances.
Analyze consolidated results.

y
l
n

2-112

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Global Consolidation System > Consolidation Process Steps
Before you can run a consolidation, you must create consolidation mappings
and elimination sets. These are set up steps that are only completed when the
consolidation is initially set up and to maintain the consolidations. Defining
these is covered in another module.
You will concentrate on the steps to run a consolidation using the Global
Consolidation System (GCS) in this module. These steps are completed
whenever you need to generate consolidated data.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 114

Consolidation Implementation Considerations


Consolidation Implementation
Considerations
Do you need multiple sets of books?
If you have multiple sets of books, can your
consolidation needs be met by using FSG reports or
will you need to use the Global Consolidation
System (GCS)?
Do all businesses use Oracle General Ledger?
Do all businesse s re side in the same instance?
Will you need a separate set of books for
consolidation, or can you consolidate in the parent?

y
l
n

2-113

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Global Consolidation System > What You Can Consolidate

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 115

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-114

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 116

What is an Oracle Budget?


What is an Oracle Budget?
Oracle budgets can be set up to calculate the same
way actuals are calculated.
For example, if you allocate total benefit costs to
cost centers based on headcount, you can budget
headcount and total benefit costs, and let Oracle
General Ledger created detailed cost center
budgets for you.
Oracle budget balances can be translated to create
budget versus actual reports in reporting
currencies.

y
l
n

2-115

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 117

What is an Oracle Budget?


What is an Oracle Budget?
Oracle General Ledger provides a variety of tools to
create, maintain, and track your budgets:
Upload budget amounts from an Excel spreadsheet.
Create an unlimited number of budgets or
forecasts.
Control user access to budgets.
Create budget organizations to mirror the levels of
your companys organization and to control user
access to budget information.
Structure your budget into an unlimited number of
levels.
Create master-detail budgets.

y
l
n

2-116

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 118

Anatomy of an Oracle Budget


Anatomy of an Oracle Budget
A budget consists of periods, accounts, and amounts.

Name: FY2001
Periods

Jan-2001 to Dec-2001

Accounts
001-010
002-200

..
..

$3000
$1500

Amounts

y
l
n

2-117

You can define a maximum of sixty budget periods.

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 119

O
e

Demonstration
Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to define a budget.

y
l
n

2-118

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 120

Budget Organizations
Budget Organizations
Budget organizations can be set up for each entity that
maintains a budget.
Maintenance
CC #100

Administration
CC #200

Engineering
CC #300

y
l
n

2-119

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Budgeting > Defining Budget Organizations

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 121

Budget Organizations
Budget Organizations
Budget organizations:
Contain ranges of accounts that make up the
budget.
Represent departments, cost centers, divisions, or
other groups for which you enter and maintain
budget data.
Options:
ALL budget organization
Password to re strict acce ss

y
l
n

2-120

Account ranges cannot overlap for the same currency within the same set of
books.
The following are reasons for defining budget organizations:
- Security
- Displaying budget information
- Freezing budgets by organization

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 122

Defining Budget Accounts


Defining Budget Accounts
From the Define Budget Organization window, select
the appropriate action.
AutoCopy

Ranges

Assignments

Assign ranges of
accounts, currency,
and entry type.

Copy accounts from


an existing budget
organization.

Review, delete, or
add accounts within
a given range.

Review or delete
accounts. Cannot
add or modify.

Assign budgetary
control options.

Range
assignments

y
l
n

2-121

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Budgeting > Defining Budget Organizations
> Assigning Account Ranges to a Budget
You can use the Define Budget Organization window to perform the AutoCopy,
Ranges, and Assignments actions as well as the following functions:
Delete: Choose Delete to launch the delete budget organization program for
the current organization. Note that you do not have to delete all account
assignments from a budget organization before deleting that budget
organization.
Maintain: Choose Maintain to launch a concurrent process that adds newly
created account combinations or deletes recently disabled account
combinations for a budget organization.
Oracle General Ledger only assigns account combinations that fall within
the account ranges associated with a budget organization.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 123

AutoCopying Budget Organizations


AutoCopying Budget Organizations
Copy accounts and corresponding ranges from an
existing budget organization to a new budget
organization. Specify an override for at least one
Accounting Flexfield segment.

Source budget
organization
Maintenance
CC #100
Segment override
Balancing Segment
Cost Center
Account

New budget
organization
Administration
CC #200

___
200
___

y
l
n

2-122

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Budgeting > Defining Budget Organizations
> Copy Acct Ranges from an Existing Budget
If you have not assigned account ranges to a budget organization, you can
copy the range assignments from another budget organization using
AutoCopy.
After using AutoCopy, you can add other account ranges to the budget
organization, or delete copied ranges from your budget organization.
Autocopy submits a concurrent process that copies the account ranges
overriding the specific segment(s) indicated. When this process finishes, it
submits a second concurrent request that takes these new ranges and finds
all account combinations that fall within the range and assigns them to the
organization.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 124

Entering Budget Amounts


Entering Budget Amounts
Budget amounts can be entered in many ways:
Journal mode
Worksheet mode
Individual account mode

y
l
n

2-123

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Budgeting > Entering Budget Amounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 125

Finalizing Budgets
Finalizing Budgets
Use a three-step process to ensure the accuracy of
your budgets.
Step 1:
Review budget
information.

Step 2:
Correct budget
information.

Step 3:
Freeze budgets.

y
l
n

2-124

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >


Budgeting > Performing a Budget Inquiry
(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle General Ledger >
Budgeting > Freezing Budgets
Review budget amounts by period and account combination. Check for budget
variances and violations.
Perform online review of master/detail budgets. Compare summary balances
between master/detail budgets.
Freeze budgets to prevent further update to completed budgets.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 126

Types of Budget Entry Methods


Types of Budget Entry Methods
Budget Entry
Method

Journal Entry
Created?

Budget Amounts

No

Budget Journals
Budget Formulas

No

MassBudget Journals
Transferred Budget
Amounts
Budget Wizard

No

Journal Wizard
Upload Budgets

No

y
l
n

2-125

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Budgeting > Defining Budgets
(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >
Oracle General Ledger > Setting Up General Ledger >
Defining Sets of Books > Defining Sets of Books
When you define a budget, you choose whether to require budget journals for
your budget. If you enabled the Require Budget Journals flag for your set of
books, this option will already be selected and cannot be changed.
When you require budget journals, you can only use budget entry methods that
create journals, namely budget journals, MassBudgets, budget transfers,
consolidation of budget balances, and the Applications Desktop Integrators
Journal Wizard.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 127

Budgetary Control
Budgetary Control
Budgetary control is the process of recording
budget data and tracking encumbrance and actual
data against the budget.
You can track budget or encumbrance data using
one of the following methods:
encumbrance accounting
budgetary amounts

Funds checking is the feature of budgetary control


that helps prevent overspending budgets by
verifying available funds online before processing a
transaction.

y
l
n

2-126

(Help) Oracle Applications Help > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Budgeting > Funds Checking
Enabling budgetary control is the first step in setting up funds checking.
You can elect to perform funds checking with Budgetary control and
encumbrances. You can post encumbrances to individual line items accounts
and summary accounts. However, used alone, Budgetary control and
encumbrances does not automatically verify that there is sufficient funding in
the accounts.
Suggestion: to use funds checking, enable budgetary control when you create a
set of books. If you enable budgetary control later, you might overspend
budgets, because Oracles does not retroactively create encumbrances for
transactions approved before you enabled the budgetary control flag.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 128

Encumbrances
Encumbrances
Use encumbrances to track pre-expenditures
(encumbrances) and avoid overspending on a
project.
For full capabilities, use budgetary controls, which
are set up when you define a set of books.
If you choose thi s option, encumbrances are created
automatically for your transactions in General Ledger,
Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Payables.

y
l
n

2-127

If you do not enable budgetary control, you can still enter manual encumbrances
via journal entry, but you cannot generate encumbrances from requisitions and
purchase orders.
There are two options for using encumbrance data to monitor over-expenditure
of a budget:
After actuals and encumbrances have been posted, you can generate reports
to show over-expenditures.
You can also use funds checking to prevent over-expenditures before they
occur.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 129

Agenda

Agenda

General Ledger process


Global Accounting Engine
Set of Books
Journal Entries
Intercompany Accounting
Multiple Reporting Currencies
Consolidations
Budgeting
Reporting

y
l
n

2-128

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 130

Reporting and Analysis Capabilities


Reporting and Analysis Capabilities
Oracle General Ledger
Standard reports and listings
Financial Statement Generator (FSG)

Applications Desktop Integrator (ADI)


Report Wizard
Request Center
Analysi s Wizard

Oracle Financial Analyzer (OFA)

y
l
n

2-129

The primary difference between standard reports and FSG reports is that
standard reports come predefined with Oracle General Ledger; standard reports
can be both financial in nature (journal listings, GL reports, trial balances,
account analysis and others) and non-financial in nature (chart of accounts,
consolidations, report definition, massallocation definition, and other reports).
FSG reports are customizable to meet the customers business needs.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 131

Standard Reports and Listings


Standard Reports and Listings
Oracle General Ledger gives you a complete set of
standard reports. Categories of standard reports and
listings include
Account Analysis: Accumulated balances of a range
of accounts and all journal entry lines that affect
that range.
Budget: Information about your budgets and budget
organizations, including account assignments and
budget hierarchies.
Chart of Accounts: Information about the accounts
in your chart of accounts, including segment
values, rollup ranges, and suspense accounts.

y
l
n

2-130

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 132

Standard Reports and Listings (continued)


Standard Reports and Listings (continued)
Multi-Company Accounting and Consolidation:
Information about your multi-company accounting
and consolidation activities. Intercompany
transactions made can be viewed using GLs GIS
feature.
Currency: Daily, period, and historical rates that
you defined for foreign currencies.
Financial Statement Generator: Summary or detail
information about the definitions of your Financial
Statement Generator report components, reports,
and report sets.
General Ledger: Beginning and ending account
balances, and all journal entry lines affecting each
account balance in your functional and foreign
currencies.

y
l
n

2-131

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 133

Standard Reports and Listings (continued)


Standard Reports and Listings (continued)
Journals: Journal information in functional and
foreign currencies, including posted, unposted, and
error journals. You can also review journal activity
for particular periods and balancing segments.
Trial Balance: Account balances and activity for
functional and foreign currencies, budgets,
encumbrances, and actuals.
Execution: Automatically generated after
concurrent processes have completed.
Other: Information about
MassAllocation/MassBudget definitions, recurring
journal formulas, statistical units of measure, and
value-added taxes received and paid.

y
l
n

2-132

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 134

Demonstration
Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to run a standard
report.

y
l
n

2-133

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 135

Financial Statement Generator


Financial Statement Generator
Oracle General Ledgers Financial Statement
Generator (FSG) is a powerful and flexible financial
report building tool you can use to build your own
custom financial reports without programming.
FSG Report
Rows

Columns

y
l
n

2-134

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 136

Customized Financial Reports


Customized Financial Reports
Use a four-step process to define and run your FSG
reports.
1. Define row sets.
2. Define column sets.

3. Define financial reports and report sets.

4. Request financial reports and report sets.

y
l
n

2-135

Before you define a report in Oracle General Ledger, draft your report on paper.
Sketching the report in advance helps you plan the format and content of the
report and saves you time later.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 137

Summary
Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:
Describe the process flow of Oracle General Ledger
Identify the setup steps and implementation
considerations for Oracle General Ledger
Describe reporting options that can be used when
implementing Oracle applications

y
l
n

2-136

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 138

Practice: Create a Journal Entry Batch


Task
Create a Journal Entry Batch

Business Situation
A memo from your controller informs you that the Consulting Department (#420)
has purchased computers in the latest open period. The computers are valued at
$85,000, of which the office is paying $5,000 cash and the remainder will be
covered as a liability over the following year. An additional memo from your
controller informs you of $135,000 of one-time sales revenues earned by selling
these computers on credit. Record the journals for the memos in one batch using
a batch control total.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Use Responsibility General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Journals > Enter (B) New Batch

Line
10
20
30

y
l
n

Batch: XX Computer Purchases and Sales (where XX is your student


number)

Control Total: 220000 (optional)

Select the Journals button

Journal: XX Computer Purchases (where XX is your student number)

Period: Current Period

Category: Addition

Currency: USD

Enter the following (where XX is your student number):

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

&
l
a

O
e

Account
01-000-1560-21XX-000
01-000-1110-21XX-000
01-000-2210-21XX-000

Description
Computers and Software
Cash
Accounts Payable

Save
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 139

Debit
85000

Credit
5000
80000

Select Yes in the Decision window

At the Header level of XX Computer Purchases, press the New icon to


create a second journal entry within this batch

Name: XX Computer Sales (where XX is your student number)

Period: Current Period

Category: Revenue

Currency: USD

Enter the following (where XX is your student number):

Line
10
20

Account
01-000-1210-21XX-000
01-420-4110-21XX-000

Description
Accounts Receivable
Revenue

Save

Return to the Navigator window

Debit
135000

135000

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 140

Credit

Practice: Statistical Journal Entry


Task
Statistical Journal Entry

Business Situation
The controller wants to keep track of debit headcount statistics for Departments
410, 420 and 430 starting in the latest open period.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Journals > Enter (B) New Journal

Journal: XX Employee Statistics (where XX is your student number)

Period: Current Period

Category: Headcount

Currency: STAT

Description: Headcount

Enter the following (where XX is your student number):

Line
10
20
30

y
l
n

Account
01-410-9110-21XX-000
01-420-9110-21XX-000
01-430-9110-21XX-000

Debit
100
150
100

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

Save

Return to the Navigator window

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 141

O
e

Practice: Journal Posting


Task
Journal Posting
There are two methods to Post Journals:
More Actions button
Journals/Post form.
This Practice will cover both methods when you post the journal entries you
previously created in Practices Create a Journal Entry Batch and Statistical
Journal Entry.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Journals >Enter

Find Batch: XX Computer Purchases and Sales (where XX is your


student number)

y
l
n

(Tip: use wildcard. Ex: XX Com%)

Click the Find button

Select the More Actions button

Select the Post button

Click OK in the Note window

(N) Journals > Post

&
l
a

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

Find Batch: XX Employee Statistics <Date> <Time> (where XX is


your student number)

n
I
e

(Tip: use wildcard. Ex: XX Emp%)

l
c
a

Click the Find button

Click in the check box to the left of the Period field to select XX
Employee Statistics for posting

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 142

Select the Post button

Click OK in the Note window

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 143

Practice: Reviewing Account Balances


Task
Reviewing Account Balances
Find the current period account balance for account 01-000-1210-21XX-000 and
review the journal entries that created the balance.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Inquiry > Account

Period: Current Period

Click mouse in the Accounts row

Enter the following (where XX is your student number):

Company
Department
Account
Sub-Account
Product

Low
01
000
1210
21XX
000

y
l
n

High
01
000
1210
21XX
000

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

Select the Show Balances button

Verify PTD as $135,000

Select the Journal Details button

Select the Show Full Journal button

From the top Menu Bar choose Tools >T Accounts

Click on the T Accounts Button

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 144

Practice: Defining a Budget


Task
Defining a Budget
In this practice you will define a budget for the 12 periods January 2000 through
December 2000.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility >General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Budgets > Define > Budget

Name: XX Budget 2000 (where XX is your student number)

Status: Open

First: Jan-00

Last: Dec-00

Select the Open Next Year button

Select Yes in the Decision window

Select OK in the Note window

&
l
a

y
l
n

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 145

Practice: Define a Budget Organization


Task
Define a Budget Organization
In this practice you will create a budget organization named XX Territory to be
associated with the XX Budget 2000 budget created in Practice Defining a
Budget.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility >General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Budgets > Define > Organization

Name: XX Territory (where XX is your student number)

Display Sequence:
Company
1
Department
Account
3
Sub-Account
Product

y
l
n

4
5

O
e

s
U

Select the Ranges button

Enter the following information (where XX is your student number)

Line
10
20

Low
01-420-7120-21XX-000
01-410-9110-21XX-000

I
A
O

High
01-420-7740-21XX-000
01-430-9110-21XX-000

&
l
a

n
r
te

Save and select OK in the Note window

Task

n
I
e

l
c
a

Verify that the process has completed.

r
O

Solution

Select (M) View > Requests

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 146

Type
Entered
Entered

Currency
USD
STAT

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 147

Practice: Assigning Budget Accounts


Task
Assigning Budget Accounts
In this practice you will assign new accounts to your previously defined XX
Territory budget organization (Practice: Define a Budget Organization)

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Budgets > Define > Organization

Query your budget organization:

[F11] XX Territory [Crtl + F11]

Select the Ranges button

Select the range 01-420-7120-21XX-000 through 01-420-7740-21XX000

Select the Range Assignments button

Enter the following (where XX is your student number) for Line 10:
Account Number:
01-420-7120-21XX-000
01-420-7640-21XX-000
01-420-7650-21XX-000
01-420-7740-21XX-000

Save

&
l
a

y
l
n

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 148

Practice: Entering Budget Amounts


Task
Entering Budget Amounts
In this practice you will use budget rules to enter amounts for your previously
defined budget and budget organization (Practices Defining a Budget and Define
a Budget Organization)

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Budgets > Enter > Amounts

Budget Organization: XX Territory

Budget: XX BUDGET 2000

Accounting Periods From To: <List of Values>

Currency: STAT

Select OK in the Find Accounts window

Description
Headcount

Account
01-420-9110-21XX-000

Select Account 01-420-9110-21XX-000

Select the Budget Rules button

Rule: Repeat per Period

Amount: 40

&
l
a

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

Select the OK button

r
O

Save

Change Currency to USD

Low

O
e

Budget Amount
40 persons per month

I
A
O

y
l
n

High
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 149

Budget Rule to Use


Repeat per Period

01
420
7640
21XX
000

01
420
7740
21XX
000

Select OK in the Find Accounts window

Select Account 01-420-76500-21XX-000

Select the Budget Rules button

Rule: Divide Evenly

Amount: 36000

Select the OK button

Save

Choose the Post button

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 150

Practice: Running Standard Reports


Task
Running Standard Reports

Business Situation
Your manager has asked you to run a Chart of Accounts-Account Hierarchy
Listing. After you have submitted the report, view your request and report output
online

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Reports > Request > Standard

Select OK to submit a Single Request in the Submit a New Request


window

Request Name: Chart of Accounts-Account Hierarchy <List of Values>

Select the Submit Request button

Select No in the Decision window

Task
View the Request online

&
l
a

Solution
(M) View > Request

y
l
n

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

Select Find to find All My Requests

n
I
e

If the Request has not completed, select the Refresh Data button until the request
has Completed

l
c
a

Select the View Output button

Close window

Return to the Navigator window

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 151

Practice: Creating and Submitting a Request Set


Task
Creating and Submitting a Request Set

Business Situation
Your manager has asked you to create a Request Set containing Journals-General
(180 Char) and General Ledger-(180 Char). Some of the Parameters for the
request Journals-General (180 Char) will be predefined. Each request will be
submitted upon the completion of the previous request, and the processing will be
aborted should a request fail.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Other > Report > Set
Part A: Define the Request Set

y
l
n

Select the Request Set Wizard button

Select Next to run the requests Sequentially in the Request Set Wizard
window

Select Next to Abort Processing in the Request Set Wizard window

Set: XX Request Set (where XX is your student number)

Application: Oracle General Ledger <List of Values>

Description: XX Journal and General Ledger Set (where XX is your


student number)

Select the Next button

Select Next to print each request As Each Request in the Set Completes
in the Request Set Wizard window

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Program: Journals-General (180 Char) <List of Values>

Program: General Ledger-(180 Char) <List of Values>

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 152

Select the Finish button

Select OK in the Note window

Part B: Define the Parameters for Journals-General (180Char)

Select the Define Stages button in the Request Set window

Select the Requests button to define the Parameters for Journals-General


(180Char)

Select the Parameters button

Enter the following:

Save

Return to the Navigator window

Set
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80

Prompt
Type
Posting Status
Currency
Period
Start Date
End Date
Source
Batch Name

Type
Constant
Constant
Constant

Value
Line Item
Posted Journals
USD

y
l
n

O
e

Task
Submitting the Request Set
Submit the Request Set you just created

Solution

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

(N) Reports > Request > Standard

n
r
te

Select Request Set by click mouse in the Option Button, and select OK

Request Set: XXRequest Set <List of Values>

Enter the following Parameters for Journals-General(180 Char)

n
I
e

cl

Posting Status
Period

a
r
O

Posted Journals
May-97

Select the OK button

Enter the following Parameters for General Ledger-(180 Char)


Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 153

Type
Line Item
Currency
USD
Balance Type
A
Starting Period
May-97
Ending Period
May-97
Accounting Flexfield
Low
01
410
5800
0000
000

High
01
430
5800
0000
000

Select the OK button (twice)

Select the Submit Request button

Select No in the Decision window

Task
View the output online

Solution
(M) View > Requests

y
l
n

Select Find to find All My Requests

If the Request has not completed, select the Refresh Data button until the
request has Completed

Notice that 5 requests have been submitted


Request Set
Journals-General (180 Char) Submission
Journals-General (180 Char) Output
General Ledger (180 Char) Submission
General Ledger (180 Char) Output

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

Close window

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle General Ledger


Chapter 2 - Page 154

Applications Desktop
Integrator
Chapter 3

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 1

Applications Desktop Integrator

Applications Desktop Integrator

Module 3

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to
describe the features of the Application Desktop
Integrator.

y
l
n

3-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 3

Agenda
Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 4

ADI Family
ADI Family

General
General
Ledger
Ledger
Integration
Integration

Request
Request
Center
Center

Submit reports
and programs
Publishing
Use themes
Monitor requests

Assets
Assets
Integration
Integration

Journals
Record physical
Budgets
inventor y
Reports
Create assets
Analysis
Account Hierarchy Import text files
Editor

y
l
n

3-4

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 5

General Ledger Functionality


General Ledger Functionality
Enter Journals

Enter Budgets

Account Hierarchy Editor Budgets

Define Report

Request Center

Analyze Report

y
l
n

3-5

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Introduction > General Ledger

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 6

Assets Functionality
Assets Functionality
Create Assets

Import Text Files

Record Physical Inventor y

Request Center

y
l
n

3-6

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Introduction > Oracle Assets
(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop
Integrator > Introduction > Oracle Applications

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 7

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 8

ADI Journal Wizard Features


ADI Journal Wizard Features
ADI Journal Wizard lets you:
Use all the features of Microsoft Excel to assist with
data entry such as cut, copy, and paste
Link two or more journal worksheets together to
save time and data entry
Save your journal worksheet as an Excel file to use
again
Check whether converted amounts are within a
specified threshold
Allow only balanced journals to upload to General
Ledger
Enforce fixed conversion rates between the EURO
and National Currency Units

y
l
n

3-8

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Applications Desktop


Integrator > Journal Wizard

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 9

Integrating with Oracle General Ledger


Integrating with Oracle General Ledger
You create your journal entry in a spreadsheet,
using all of the Microsoft Excel features that you are
familiar with. When you are ready, upload your
journal entry from ADI to the GL_INTERFACE table.
Import your journal from the GL_INTERFACE table
into Oracle GL to create a journal entry. When your
journal entries have been validated by General
Ledger, unposted journal entries are created.

y
l
n

3-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 10

Create Journal Worksheet


Create Journal Worksheet
Complete two regions in the Create Journal Worksheet
window:
Journal Type
Functional Actuals - Journal entries using the
functional currency of your set of books
Foreign Actuals - Journal entries using a foreign
currency
Budgets - Journal entries that will be posted against a
budget (choose a budget org from the poplist)
Encumbrances - Journal entries to update
encumbrance balances

y
l
n

3-10

If a company requires budget journals (predominantly used by the public sector),


it cannot use ADI Budget Wizard to upload budgets. Use the Journal Wizard
functionality instead. See the module on Budget Wizard for more information.
If you need to enter a statistical journal, select Functional Actuals and change the
currency to STAT once you have created the Journal worksheet.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 11

Number of Journals
Number of Journals
You can use a journal worksheet to enter one journal
entry or a journal batch. You must specify the number
of journal entries you are going to enter before the
Journal Wizard will create a journal worksheet.

or

Single

Multiple

y
l
n

3-11

Number of Journals
Single: Use to prepare an individual journal entry. Information common to
all lines in your journal entry will be reflected in the journal worksheet
header.
Multiple: Use to prepare multiple journal entries. All information pertaining
to a journal entry, even that which is common to more than one line, is
entered on each line of a multiple journal entry.
With multiple journal entries, you can combine journal entries which have
different categories, sources, and currencies on a single journal worksheet.
You can then upload these different journal entries at the same time. When
Oracle General Ledger imports the entries from the GL Interface table, it
will separate the lines into appropriate entries and batches.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 12

Results
Results
Choose OK in the Define Worksheet Layout window
and the Create Journal Worksheet window.
ADI launches Excel, and displays your journal
worksheet according the definitions you chose.

y
l
n

3-12

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 13

Entering Flexfield Combinations


Entering Flexfield Combinations
You can enter flexfield combinations in a variety of
methods:
Directly
Using the list of values
Using account aliases

y
l
n

3-13

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 14

Cross Validation Rules


Cross Validation Rules
When you use the list of values, all segment values
and combinations are validated.
If you have the profile option Flexfields: Validate On
Server set to Yes, any combinations that were
entered directly are cross-validated during upload,
forcing you to correct any errors before a journal
reaches the interface table.
If the profile option Flexfields: Validate On Server is
set to No, any combinations you enter directly are
validated when you import.

y
l
n

3-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 15

Uploading Journal Entries to Oracle General Ledger


Uploading Journal Entries to Oracle
General Ledger
After creating journal entries in a journal worksheet,
you must upload them to Oracle General Ledger for
posting.

Journal Import

Upload to interface

GL_INTERFACE
Table

y
l
n

3-15

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 16

Using Journal Upload Options


Using Journal Upload Options
When you choose the Upload to Interface icon from
the Ledger poplist of the ADI toolbar, the Upload
Journals to Interface window appears:
Select to upload flagged rows or all rows
Select a prevalidation type
Full: validates all journal data and performs crossvalidation
Partial: validates all journal data except accounts
None: perform s segment security checking only

y
l
n

3-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 17

Using Journal Upload Options


Using Journal Upload Options
Start Journal Import: to make your journal upload
and import to General Ledger a one-step process.
Post Account Errors to Suspense: to post journal
lines with errors to a predefined suspense account
(set in General Ledger).
Create Summary Journals: to summarize all journal
lines that share the same account combination.
Descriptive Flex: to import descriptive flexfields
with or without validation (use when you have
defined a descriptive flexfield in General Ledger
Enter Journals window).

y
l
n

3-17

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 18

Using Journal Import Options


Using Journal Import Options
If you choose to upload and import your journals in
two steps, you can submit journal import from the ADI
toolbar. The Request Center monitors your request.
Choose Submit Process from the Ledger poplist of the
ADI toolbar and complete the Select Process Type
window.
You can continue creating more journal entries in
Excel because the concurrent process runs in the
background.
If you enabled the Show Upload Success Indicator
in the ADI General Options window, the messages
column of the worksheet displays a green success
indicator in each row you have uploaded.

y
l
n

3-18

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 19

Troubleshooting the Import Process


Troubleshooting the Import Process
You must have a valid accounting date before you
can upload.
You must have a value in either the debit or credit
fields.
You must have a balanced journal entry if the profile
option GLDI: Force Journal to Balance is set to yes.
If you specify a reversal period but leave the
Reverse Journal field blank, the journal upload
process will fail for that journal.
ADI interprets three adjoining blank rows as the end
of the journal entry. Any lines that appear after three
blank lines will be ignored.

y
l
n

3-19

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 20

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-20

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 21

Overview of the Applications Desktop Integrator


Overview of the Applications Desktop
Integrator
ADI includes the Budget Wizard and Journal Wizard
to simplify your budgeting work with Oracle General
Ledger.
A/C
A/C
01.100.1120.000.000.000
01.100.1120.000.000.000
01.100.4160.000.000.000
01.100.4160.000.000.000
01.100.4199.000.000.000
01.100.4199.000.000.000

Debit
Credit
Debit
Credit
$100
$100
$75
$75
$25
$25

Budget Worksheet/
Journal Worksheet

GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE

General Ledger

y
l
n

3-21

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Oracle General Ledger > Budgeting > Entering Budgets Using ADI

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 22

Audit Trail Implications


Audit Trail Implications
When you use the Budget Wizard, Oracle General
Ledger does not create an audit trail
When you use the Journal Wizard, Oracle General
Ledger does create an audit trail

Use this ADI feature...

Instead of this Oracle General


Ledger window ...

Budget Wizard

Enter Budget Amounts window

Journal Wizard

Enter Budget Journals window

y
l
n

3-22

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 23

Overview of Budget Wizard


Overview of Budget Wizard
The Budget Wizard:
Automatically builds a budget worksheet based on
the budgets and budget organizations that you set
up within Oracle General Ledger
Downloads all of the account combinations that are
assigned to your budget organization, along with
any existing budget amounts

y
l
n

3-23

(Help) Applications Help Library > Oracle Financial Applications >


Applications Desktop Integrator > Budget Wizard

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 24

Budget Wizard Possibilities


Budget Wizard Possibilities
With Budget Wizard, you can:
Download or modify existing budget balances from
Oracle General Ledger, or create a new budget
Create and update balances manually, using budget
rules, or using formulas and models
Graph the budget values in your worksheet as area
charts, bar graphs, column graphs, line graphs, or
pie charts
Analyze and compare actual and budget values
Save a budget worksheet to your PC
Upload new budget balances to Oracle General
Ledger

y
l
n

3-24

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 25

Budget Wizard Key Benefits


Budget Wizard Key Benefits
Eliminates double maintenance by combining a
spreadsheet with the budget elements that you
define in Oracle General Ledger
Automatically calculates your budget amounts
using any type of formula
Provides a clear picture of how your budget and
actual amounts compare for a wide range of
accounts
Allows you to justify or explain your budget using
budget notes; no external documentation or
paperwork is required

y
l
n

3-25

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 26

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-26

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 27

Overview
Overview
ADI Define Report is a graphical front-end
alternative used to define new Financial Statement
Generator (FSG) reports or create them from
existing report components. The same terminology
and logic is used for both Define Report and Oracle
General Ledger FSG.
After defining your report components, you must
save them to Oracle General Ledger (GL) as FSG
report objects in order to publish reports.

y
l
n

3-27

If you want users to just submit reports and not create or modify report
components, give them access to Request Center only.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 28

Overview (continued)
Overview (continued)
You can download existing FSG reports or report
components, modify them in Define Report, and
then save the modified definition back to the
database.
When you are ready to publish your report, use the
Request Center to submit and publish your report.
You can choose to publish your report output as a
spreadsheet, Web (HTML), or text file. The Request
Center is discussed in the lesson on submitting and
publishing reports.

y
l
n

3-28

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 29

Define Report Features


Define Report Features
Provides a spreadsheet-based interface to the GL
financial reporting engine, FSG
Includes a wizard-driven interface that decreases
the number of keystrokes required to define a report
Expands upon the familiar spreadsheet interface by
adding menu choices, including right mouse button
support to quickly invoke a special Define Report
menu
Supports report definitions for all user levels; which
method you choose depends on how comfortable
you are with writing financial reports

y
l
n

3-29

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 30

Define Report Features (continued)


Define Report Features (continued)
Includes a Report Navigator that gives you a clear
understanding of the structure of even the most
complex report
Includes a new Content Set Generator that enables
you to easily create new content sets or modify
existing ones

y
l
n

3-30

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 31

Integrating with Oracle GL


Integrating with Oracle GL
In Oracle GL, a report is made up of a row set and a
column set. A financial report is the intersection of a
row set and column set.
Defining a Row Set - Generally, when you define a
row set you define the account assignments. You
also define the format of the rows, such as
descriptions, indentations, and lines. A row can be a
descriptive row or text only, composed of account
assignments, or a calculation.
Defining a Column Set - Generally, when you define
a column set you define attributes of your report
such as the format mask, factor, balance type, and
relative period. You can define calculations,
exceptions, and control values (for budgets and
currency). You must also define column headings.

y
l
n

3-31

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Getting Started with ADI

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 32

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-32

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 33

Analyze Report Features


Analyze Report Features
Analyze Report offers full support for average
balances and cross-set of books drilldown
Segment security is enforced using the Oracle
General Ledger (GL) profile option FSG: Enforce
Segment Value Security
With multidimensional data analysis, you can drag
account segments, periods, and other dimensions
to different areas of your drill window. Analyze
Report reorganizes the displayed information to
reflect your new dimensions
Data can be exported to Microsoft Excel or the
Windows clipboard

y
l
n

3-33

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Analysis Wizard > Analysis Wizard Features

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 34

Analyze Report Features (continued)


Analyze Report Features (continued)
You can drill down to summary accounts, detail
accounts, journal details, and subledger details.
Note: Before you can use Analyze Report, you must
use Request Center to publish a financial report to a
Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

y
l
n

3-34

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Analysis Wizard > Analysis Wizard Features

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 35

How to Start Analyze Report


How to Start Analyze Report
1. Publish a financial report to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet and select a specific financial amount
(not a calculated amount).
2. Click Analyze Report on the Applications Desktop
Integrator (ADI) toolbar or double-click on the amount.
Note: You must enable the double-click analysis
functionality in the Environment region of the Default
Drill Options window for Analyze Report.

y
l
n

3-35

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 36

How to Start Analyze Report (continued)


How to Start Analyze Report (continued)
3. The Context window opens, displaying information
about the amount on which you have chosen to drill
down. Included is the amount, what the amount
includes (Detail, Summary, or Both balances), the
period, the currency, and the amount type.

y
l
n

3-36

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 37

About the Analyze Report Toolbar


About the Analyze Report Toolbar
From the Analyze Report toolbar, you can access all
the features of Analyze Report for drilling down to
detail accounts and balances.

y
l
n

3-37

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Analysis Wizard > Analysis Wizard Toolbar
Make sure that you have chosen a cell from the financial report that is a balance,
not a calculation. Test each of the buttons to better understand each of the
functions. Export to Excel is a very useful feature.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 38

Possible Drilldown Flows


Possible Drilldown Flows
Context 1

Summary

Amount $7,000

T.199 2,000
T.299 4,000
T.399 1,000

Detail for T.299


01.200 2,000
01.201 500
01.202 1,500

Journal Details
Line 10 01.202 800
Line 20 01.202 450
Line 30 01.202 250
Subledger Details

BusinessWorld Inv#1923 7/15/98 800

y
l
n

3-38

The Show Summary Accounts button is only available when summary ranges are
defined for the context amount.
The Show Detail Accounts button is only available when detail account ranges are
defined for the context amount.
Subledger details are only available for journals originating from Oracle
Receivables, Payables, Assets, Projects, Purchasing, Inventory, and Work in
Process (WIP).

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 39

Using Dimensions and Display Options


Using Dimensions and Display Options
You can use the online analytical processing (OLAP)
capabilities of Analyze Report to pivot your report
dimensionsyour individual account segmentsin
real time.
This enables you to work through various
scenarios, rather than writing several custom
reports
Analyze Report creates a matrix showing the
detailed accounts by period. The matrix has three
dimensions: page, row, and column
Note: The row dimension values are the flexfield
segment values, and the column dimension values
are time

y
l
n

3-39

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Analysis Wizard > Drilling Down to Summary and Detail
Accounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 40

How to Change Your View


How to Change Your View
How to Change Your View
Simply drag one segment (such as the account
segment) from one dimension (the row dimension)
and drop it into another dimension (such as the
column dimension)
Use your right mouse button to quickly move
segments to the row dimension or the page
dimension
The right mouse button also enables you to show all
values or to limit the values to view by filtering the
values

y
l
n

3-40

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Analysis Wizard > Drilling Down to Summary and Detail
Accounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 41

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-41

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 42

Overview
Overview
The Request Center provides a central location for
submitting, publishing, and monitoring reports and
concurrent programs for any Oracle Application
Some of the benefits of Request Center include:
Publishing reports automatically to a Web page or
spreadsheet
Using themes to format reports
Formatting at the cell level
Monitoring any concurrent request submitted from any
Oracle application across multiple database s

y
l
n

3-42

Cell level formatting pertains to the financial reports used in Oracle General
Ledger (GL). Variable reports are used in Oracle Assets. These reports are similar
to standard reports, except that you can choose the columns and order of the
columns in the report. Variable reports used to be known as Report eXchange.
Some reports submitted from the Request Center do not contain a list of values
and require you to enter their criteria manually.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 43

Use Request Center


Use Request Center
Submit any standard fixed, variable format, or
financial report from a central location.
Publish the output to a spreadsheet or Web page
automatically.
Format reports by applying themes.
Use cell level formatting to enhance the appearance
of your reports.
Monitor your concurrent requests.
Create a hotlist to mark important requests for quick
reference.

y
l
n

3-43

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 44

Using the Request Center


Using the Request Center
Use the Request Center to:
Submit financial reports or any Oracle Applications
standard report or listing
Submit variable format reports
Automatically publish the report to spreadsheets or
a Web page

y
l
n

3-44

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 45

Toolbar Icons
Toolbar Icons
From the Request Center toolbar, you can access all of
the Request Center features for submitting,
monitoring, and publishing your reports.
Submit Report - Submit standard or financial reports
to be run on your server
Show Request Details - Show submission details,
such as phase, status, and request date, for a
selected request
Cancel Request - Cancel a concurrent request
View Output/Log - Download the report output or
log file of a selected request and view it in the
default output viewer

y
l
n

3-45

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > Getting Started with ADI > ADI Toolbar

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 46

Toolbar Icons (continued)


Toolbar Icons (continued)
Publish Report - Download and publish the report
output of a selected request to a Web page,
Microsoft Excel worksheet, or text viewer
Publish Sets - Download and publish report and
request sets, created in Oracle Applications, using
the Request Center. You can apply publishing
templates (themes and publishing options) to each
report in the set then publish all reports in a
Financial or Standard Report set. Publishing
Templates can be saved and reused.
Report Manager Tools - Set the formatting options
for your report output (You can select from
predefined report themes or define your own)

y
l
n

3-46

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 47

Toolbar Icons (continued)


Toolbar Icons (continued)
Print Output/Log - Download a report output or log
file and print it to a local or network printer
Monitor Request - Select a request to monitor (The
request is added to the Pending or Completed tab in
the Request Center window)
Add Request to Hotlist - Place a completed request
in a special hotlist holding area (Deleting requests
from the Completed tab does not affect the entries
in the hotlist)
Stop Monitoring Selected Request - Remove a
selected request from either the Pending,
completed, or Hotlist tabs of the Request Center
window

y
l
n

3-47

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 48

Toolbar Icons (continued)


Toolbar Icons (continued)
Stop Monitoring ALL Requests - Remove all
requests from the Pending, Completed, or Hotlist
tabs of the Request Center window
Signon - Sign on to an Oracle Applications database
(You must sign on before you can monitor requests
for a specific database)
Disconnect - Disconnect from the selected Oracle
Applications database
Change Responsibility - Select a different
responsibility when you have signed on to the
database
ADI - Start ADI if it is installed on your PC

y
l
n

3-48

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 49

Toolbar Icons (continued)


Toolbar Icons (continued)
Oracle Applications - Start Oracle Applications if
they are installed on your PC (When you click this
button, you will be asked to select an applications
database. If you select the same database that you
are using for your Request Center session, you will
not have to enter your username and password in
Oracle Applications)
Options - Set the Request Center options
Help - Access the Request Center online Help
features
Minimize - Minimize the Request Center window
Exit - Close and exit the Request Center
Pending Request - Indicates that a request is
currently pending

y
l
n

3-49

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 50

Selecting a Report Type


Selecting a Report Type
When you click the Submit icon in the Request Center
toolbar, you open the Report Submission and
Publishing window. You can select from the following
reports in the Report Type region:
Standard (Fixed Format) - Submit any standard
reports that are available in Oracle Applications if
they are available to your responsibility
Standard (Variable Format) - Submit any variable
format report that enables the user to define the
content and order of the report (variable reports are
used only in Oracle Assets)

y
l
n

3-50

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > The Request Center > Submitting Reports

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 51

Selecting a Report Type (continued)


Selecting a Report Type (continued)
Financial Statement - Submit any financial report
that has been defined if your responsibility enables
you to access the reports (Financial reports are
used only in Oracle GL)

y
l
n

3-51

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 52

Selecting Publishing Options


Selecting Publishing Options
You can publish report outputs to Web pages, a
spreadsheet, or a text file. You can also choose to
have the report published automatically after
processing.
Publish Report - If you select this, ADI will publish
your report
Prompt - If you select Prompt, a dialog box appears
before the system publishes the report.
Output Type - Select how you want to publish your
report output
Themes - Select a theme to apply formatting to your
report (themes are covered later in the lesson)
Options region - Select options based on the output
type that you have selected

y
l
n

3-52

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > The Request Center > Setting Report Publishing Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 53

Overview of Web Publishing


Overview of Web Publishing
Web publishing eliminates printing reports for
manual distribution. You can publish reports
directly to a Web site by linking output to an HTML
Web page on a corporate intranet or on the Internet
Interested users log in to the Web site to subscribe
to or view selected reports. Those users who need
to analyze the report further can download a
spreadsheet version of the report from the Web site
You can apply report themes or custom formatting,
such as colors, fonts, and a corporate logo, to make
your outputs look more professional
Each time you run the report, you have the option of
automatically updating the Web page

y
l
n

3-53

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 54

Using Themes
Using Themes
You can format any report request that you submit
through the Request Center by applying a report
output theme when you publish the report
You can create new themes or customize existing
themes in a spreadsheet environment by using a
combination of ADI and Microsoft Excel formatting
features
You can fine-tune your themes by using tokens and
cell level formatting to control the appearance of
your financial reports down to the cell level; that is,
the intersection of a row and a column

y
l
n

3-54

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > The Request Center > Setting Report Submission
Options > Formatting Report Output > Using Report Output Themes

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 55

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-55

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 56

Overview
Overview
With the Account Hierarchy Editor, you can create,
maintain, simulate, view, and print hypothetical
account hierarchy structures in a variety of formats.
Your changes are directly reflected in General
Ledger programs, windows and reports. The
Account Hierarchy Editor interface is intuitive and
easy to use. You can drag and drop segments and
hierarchies to modify existing structures or to build
new ones.
You can simulate hierarchies, for example, to
predict the outcome of reorganizations.

y
l
n

3-56

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > The Account Hierarchy Editor

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 57

Integrating with General Ledger


Integrating with General Ledger
In General Ledger, segment values comprise your
accounting flexfield to create account
combinations. GL account combinations are used to
store balances for all your transactions and journal
entries.
Parent values are nonpostable and nonbudgetable
segments that have child values assigned to them.
Child values can be other lower-level parent values
or standard child segment values.
Parent values are used in General Ledger for
financial reporting, the MassAllocation feature, and
in conjunction with summary accounts.

y
l
n

3-57

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 58

Integrating with General Ledger


Integrating with General Ledger
The following diagram illustrates the concept of
parent levels in an account hierarchy.
Note: a parent level contains a parent segment
value that has one or more child segment values
associated with it.
When you select a parent level in the Account
Hierarchy Editor, you are selecting the parent
segment value plus all of its child values, which
include lower level parents and their associated
child values.

y
l
n

3-58

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Applications Desktop


Integrator > The Account Hierarchy Editor > Parent Levels in an
Account Hierarchy

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 59

Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy


Parent Levels in an Account Hierarchy
Topmost Parent

Lower Level Par ents

Lev el 1

Lev el 2

Lev el 3

3000
3000

3100
3100

3110
3110

3111
3111

3150
3150

3115
3115

3180
3180
3200
3200

3220
3220
3250
3250

3300
3300

3310
3310

3311
3311

3350
3350

3312
3312

y
l
n

3-59

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 60

Agenda

Agenda

ADI Family
Journal Wizard
Budget Wizard
Report Wizard
Analysis Wizard
Request Center
Account Hierarchy Editor
Assets Integrator

y
l
n

3-60

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 61

ADI Integration
ADI Integration
Run ADI as a stand-alone application.
You can create worksheets, which you save and
work on later.
You can create assets and enter physical inventory
at any location, without being connected to your
server.

y
l
n

3-61

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 62

ADI Features
ADI Features
Create Assets: Uploads assets from a spreadsheet
Import Text Files: Imports text files to an asset or
inventory worksheet
Record Physical Inventory: Uploads physical
inventory amounts
Request Center: Submits and publishes reports

y
l
n

3-62

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 63

Create Assets
Create Assets
Generate a worksheet based on the users
requirements
Create manual asset additions in a spreadsheet
Populate Mass Additions table from a spreadsheet
Select poplists to aid in the asset addition process
Validate data before it is loaded into Oracle Assets

y
l
n

3-63

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 64

Creating Assets
Creating Assets

Use the Create Assets feature to:


Create assets in a disconnected environment
Build customized asset worksheets
Enter asset data manually
Upload the data automatically into Oracle Assets

y
l
n

3-64

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 65

Import Text Files


Import Text Files
Map flat data files into asset or physical inventory
spreadsheets
Create reusable templates
Define a template to map between Oracle Assets
and third party applications
Use a barcode scanner to gather physical inventory
information and map the scanner output file into a
physical inventory spreadsheet

y
l
n

3-65

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 66

Importing Text Files


Importing Text Files
The Import Text File feature enables you to import data
from:
Legacy systems
Third party payables applications
Barcode scanners
Any flat data file source

y
l
n

3-66

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 67

Record Physical Inventory


Record Physical Inventory
Generate an inventory worksheet to be completed
offline
Customize the layout to the users requirements
Upload data from a barcode scanner
Validate data before it is uploaded
View comparison reports to determine if assets are
missing or in the wrong location

y
l
n

3-67

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 68

Recording Physical Inventory


Recording Physical Inventory
Use the Record Physical Inventory feature to:
Build personalized inventory spreadsheets
Enter inventory data while disconnected from the
server
Map files created from scanned barcode data
Generate comparison reports
Upload data automatically into Oracle Assets

y
l
n

3-68

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 69

Summary

Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to
describe the features of the Applications Desktop
Integrator.

y
l
n

3-69

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 70

Practice: Using the Journal Wizard


Tasks
In this practice, you will create a customized journal worksheet.

Step 1: Create a Worksheet

Create a single journal worksheet with a type of functional actuals.

Step 2: Modify the Worksheet Layout


1 Modify the worksheet by moving the Category field to the very
bottom of the header.
2 Include batch and journal name as well as line description.

Step 3: Enter a Journal Entry


1 Enter a journal entry for the latest open period. The category is
Reclass.
2 Verify the context information.
3 Name your batch and journal Unique Identifier Salary Reclass. Use
your two-digit student number as your unique identifier.

Hint: Use the same unique identifier in all of the practices.


Write the batch and journal name
here:________________________________.
4 Enter the following journal entry:
Note: XX = your student number
Account

Debit Credit

01 410 5800 21XX 000


01 420 5800 21XX 000
01 430 5800 21XX 000
01 000 2210 21XX 000

1800
900
900

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

3600

n
r
te

Step 4: Upload Your Journal Entry

Upload your journal entry. Accept the defaults.

n
I
e

l
c
a

Solution

r
O

Step 1: Create a Worksheet


1. Click the Enter Journals icon on the toolbar.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 71

O
e

y
l
n

2. Select Functional Actuals and single journal entry for a new workbook.
Step 2: Modify the Worksheet Layout
1. Click the Edit the Layout button.
2. Use the second down arrow button to move the Category field to the end,
and select the Journal Name and Batch Name check boxes.
3. Select the Lines tab and add the description field.
4. Click OK to close the Define Worksheet Layout window.
5. Click OK again to close the Create Journal Worksheet window and open
the Excel spreadsheet.
Step 3: Enter a Journal Entry
1. Select the latest open period designated by the instructor as the date. To
do this, double-click to the right of the Date field to open the list of values
from which to make your selection. Make sure that the toolbar is invoked.
This date determines the effective date and General Ledger period.
2. Select the Reclass category by double-clicking to the right of the ListText field.You can also click the List of Values icon on the ADI toolbar.

y
l
n

3. Verify the context information. Hide it by clicking the View Context


Button.

O
e

4. Name your batch and journal Unique Identifier Salary Reclass. Use your
initials or your two-digit student number as your unique identifier.

I
A
O

Write the batch and journal name


here:________________________________.

&
l
a

5. Enter the journal information.

s
U

Step 4: Upload Your Journal Entry

n
r
te

1. Click the Upload to Interface icon on the toolbar.

n
I
e

2. Accept the defaults and click OK. This will validate the journal before it
is interfaced. You should receive a message notifying you that your
upload was successful and that journal import has been initiated. Click
OK.

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 72

Practice: Using the Report Wizard


Task
Create a New Trend Report
Your supervisor has asked you to create a new trend report. The report should
display the actual balances for the current and previous three months. It should
also display six rows. Name your report XX Trend Report where XX represents
your student number

Solution
1. Click the Define Report icon on the toolbar.
2. Select the Define Report option.
3. Click the Next button to open the Report Wizard Step 2 window.
4. Select the Blank Report option.
5. Click the Next button to open the Report Wizard Step 3 window.
6. In the Report Name field enter XX - Trend Report.
7. In the Number of Rows field, enter 6.

y
l
n

O
e

8. In the Number of Columns field, enter 4. Accept the remaining default


values.

I
A
O

s
U

9. Click the Next button to open the Report Wizard Step 4 window.
10. Accept the default values for the Format and Factor fields, and select Yes
to create a trend report.

&
l
a

11. Click the Next button to open the Report Wizard Step 5 window.

n
r
te

12. For the Balance Type, select Actual.

n
I
e

13. Select Backward as the trend option with the Monthly increment.

l
c
a

14. Click the Finish button to open your report.

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 73

Practice: Using the Request Center


Task
In this practice, you will submit a financial report that is published to text.

Business Situation
You need to include a financial report for the month of January 1998 within a
document, so you decide to publish to text.

Step 1: Select a Financial Report

Select the Company Balance Sheet report from the list of values and run the
report for the period Jan-98.

Step 2: Publish to Text

Publish the output to text.

Solution
Step 1: Select a Financial Report

y
l
n

1. Select the Request Center on the task bar at the bottom of your screen.

O
e

2. Click the Submit Request icon on the Request Center toolbar.


3. Select a Financial Statement report type.

I
A
O

s
U

4. In the Existing Report field, select Company Balance Sheet from the list
of values.
5. In the Period field, select Jan-98 from the list of values.

&
l
a

6. Click the Publishing button.

n
r
te

Step 2: Publish to Text

n
I
e

1. Select the Text (Plain) output type.

l
c
a

2. Select the options shown in the following screenshot:

r
O

3. Click the Options button. Accept the defaults.


4. Click the green check mark to submit the report.
5. Click OK to acknowledge the submission of the report.
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 74

6. Your request will be in the Pending tab of the Request Center window.
When the Request Center window appears, click Yes.
7. View the output.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 75

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Applications Desktop Integrator


Chapter 3 - Page 76

Suppliers
Chapter 4

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 1

Suppliers

Suppliers

Module 4

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to
identify the setup steps and considerations that are
required for Supplier management.

y
l
n

4-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 3

Agenda

Agenda
Supplier information
Supplier setup considerations

y
l
n

4-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 4

Supplier and Supplier Site Settings


Supplier and Supplier Site Settings
Supplier

Tokyo

Paris

New York

Purchasing site
RFQ Only site

Purchasing site
Pay site

Pay site

y
l
n

4-4

A site could be made RFQ Only in the beginning of negotiations with a


supplier. Once the decision has been made to use the supplier, then the supplier
could become both an RFQ Only and Purchasing site.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 5

Entering Supplier Information


Entering Supplier Information
Oracle Payables Supplier Information
Information
Type
General

Enter at
Supplier

Enter at
Supplier Site

Yes

Yes

Classification

Yes

No

Contacts

No

Yes

Accounting

Yes

Yes

Control

Yes

Yes

Payment

Yes

Yes

Bank Accounts

Yes

Yes

y
l
n

4-5

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 6

Entering Supplier Information


Entering Supplier Information
Oracle Payables Supplier Information
Information
Type
EDI

Enter at
Supplier

Enter at
Supplier Site

Yes

Yes

Invoice Tax

Yes

Yes

Withholding Tax

Yes

Yes

Tax Reporting

Yes

Yes

Purchasing

Yes

Yes

Receiving

Yes

No

y
l
n

4-6

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 7

Overview of Entering Information at the Supplier Site


Level
Overview of Entering Information at the
Supplier Site Level
Except for the Receiving and Classification categories,
all categories of information that are entered at the
supplier level can also be entered at the supplier site
level. If an option exists at the supplier level, the value
you enter there defaults to new supplier sites.
Note: Contacts information is entered only at the
supplier site level.

y
l
n

4-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 8

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to enter a
supplier.

y
l
n

4-8

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 9

Entering Flexible Address Format Information


Entering Flexible Address Format
Information
Oracle applications enable you to enter customer,
supplier, bank, check, and remit-to addresses in
country-specific formats. For example, if you have
customers in the United Kingdom, you can enter
British addresses in the format recommended by
the Royal Mail.
Use descriptive flexfields to enter and display
address information in the appropriate formats. The
flexfield window is then displayed if the country you
enter has a flexible address style assigned to it.
If no address style is associated with the country,
the standard format is used.

y
l
n

4-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 10

Entering Employees as Suppliers


Entering Employees as Suppliers
You must enter an employee as a supplier before you
can pay the employees expense reports. You can
enable the Automatically Create Employee as Supplier
Payables option to automatically enter an employee as
a supplier during Invoice Import, or you can enter the
employee manually as a supplier in the Suppliers
window.

y
l
n

4-10

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Suppliers


> About Suppliers > Entering Employees as Suppliers

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 11

Maintaining Supplier and Supplier Site Information


Maintaining Supplier and Supplier Site
Information
When you make changes to values that default to
Oracle Payables documents, the changed value
defaults only to new documents that you subsequently
enter or create. For example, if you change the Pay
Group for a supplier site, the new Pay Group defaults
to new invoices that you enter, but the change does
not affect existing invoices.
Also, if you change a supplier value that defaults to
supplier sites, the change affects only new supplier
sites that you create, not existing supplier sites.
If you want a change to affect documents that you
enter or create for an existing supplier site, be sure to
make the changes at the supplier site level.

y
l
n

4-11

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Suppliers


> Adjusting Suppliers

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 12

Supplier Reports
Supplier Reports
Oracle Payables Supplier Reports
Report Name
Description
Suppliers Report

Review supplier, supplier site, and


supplier site contacts information

Supplier Audit Report

Review supplier names that


are similar, to help identify potential
duplicate suppliers

New Supplier/New
Supplier Site Listing

Review new supplier sites

Supplier Payment
History

Review the pa yment histor y,


including void payments, for a
supplier or a group of suppliers

Supplier Paid
Invoice History

Review the pa yment histor y,


including discount and partial
payment information, for a supplier
or group of suppliers

y
l
n

4-12

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Suppliers


> Supplier Reports

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 13

Supplier Reports
Supplier Reports
Oracle Payables Supplier Reports
Report Name
Description
Supplier Mailing
Labels

Use this report to create mailing


labels for supplier sites

Purchase Order Header Review purchase orders updated


Updates Report
by the Supplier Merge Program
Supplier Merge Report

Review the suppliers, sites, and


invoices updated by the Supplier
Merge Process

Supplier Balance
Revaluation Report

Identify suppliers with credit


(negative) balances

Supplier Customer
Netting Report

Review the net balance in Oracle


Payables and Oracle Receivables
for any suppliers or customers who
have the same NIF or VAT code

y
l
n

4-13

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 14

Merging Suppliers
Merging Suppliers

Run supplier
audit report

ABC
Identify duplicate
Corporation
suppliers

ABC
Corp

Merge suppliers

Maintain audit
trail

Review merge
results

ABC
Corporation

y
l
n

4-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 15

Merging Suppliers
Merging Suppliers
When you merge suppliers, you transfer invoices,
purchase orders, or both from one supplier and site to
another supplier and site. You can transfer to a new
supplier and site unpaid invoices only or all invoices
(including paid and partially paid invoices).
Oracle Payables will not transfer invoices if the merge
process would create a duplicate invoice for a
supplier.
Note: The merge process cannot be undone.

y
l
n

4-15

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Suppliers


> Supplier Merge Program
The transfer process moves the information from the old supplier to the new
supplier. If you choose to transfer all invoices, there will not be any invoices
under the old supplier.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 16

Agenda

Agenda
Supplier information
Supplier setup considerations

y
l
n

4-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 17

Relationship to Release 11i Applications


Relationship to Release 11i Applications
The Supplier Management Process facilitates the flow
of supplier information to and from:
Oracle Payables System
Oracle Purchasing System
Oracle Inventory System

y
l
n

4-17

Note: Supplier setup is performed in Payables and Purchasing;


Inventory sends and receives supplier and other information to
Payables and Purchasing.
Payables System
Define the financial options in the Financial Options window; see: Defining
Financials Options, Oracle Payables Users Guide (Required) Supplier
numbering
Define Suppliers (Required): You may not need to perform this step if you have
already installed and set up Oracle Payables or performed a common
applications setup. See: Entering Suppliers, Oracle Payables Users Guide.
Purchasing System
Set Up Automatic Sourcing (Optional): You can set up Purchasing to
automatically default source document information from a blanket purchase
agreement or catalog quotation onto a requisition or purchase order line for a
particular item and supplier. Or you can default just a supplier and optionally a
supplier site. See: Setting Up Automatic Sourcing: page 5 32 of the Oracle
Purchasing Users Guide.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 18

Inventory System
Define Freight Carriers (Optional): If youre also setting up Oracle Inventory,
you may already have performed this step when you set up Inventory. Define
freight carriers if you want to specify on a purchase order the freight carrier that
a supplier should use. See: Defining Freight Carriers, Oracle Inventory Users
Guide. Context: You must perform this step for each inventory organization.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 19

Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle Purchasing enables you to:
Set up the Supplier Base
Regulate document access and controls
Control purchasing activity and utilize accurate,
automatic pricing using approved suppliers and
supplier lists
Consolidate purchase requirements from multiple
warehouses, plants, or locations
Negotiate from a position of strength based on easy
access to purchase volume statistics and supplier
performance reports

y
l
n

4-18

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 20

Oracle Purchasing Overview

Oracle Purchasing Overview

Purchase
requisition

Request for
quote (RFQ)

Quotation

Supplier

Purchase
order

Receipts

Returns

Payment

y
l
n

4-19

Using Supplier Information


Supplier information is a vital component of Oracle Internet Procurement. The
following examples list the areas in which you use suppliers.
A recommended supplier is optionally entered on a requisition.
A supplier is needed to send a request for quote.
That same supplier is used when entering a quotation.
Purchase orders need supplier information.
You receive goods or services from a supplier.
You return goods to a supplier.
You must pay the supplier for the goods or services purchased.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 21

Integrating with Oracle Applications


Integrating with Oracle Applications
Shared information
Locations & organizations
Accounting & financial codes
Freight codes & items
Supplier
Management

Oracle
Applications

y
l
n

4-20

All Applications
When any Oracle Applications and Oracle Internet Procurement are used in
conjunction, they share many different pieces of information.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 22

Implementing Supplier Management


Implementing Supplier Management
Considerations:
Modeling your organizational structure in Oracle
Internet Procurement
Supplier set up issues
Defining approved suppliers
Creating rules to specify preferred suppliers
Determine supplier rating criteria

y
l
n

4-21

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 23

Multiple Organization Overview


Multiple Organization Overview
Your busine ss environment
may require multiple
organizations. An
organization allows you to
segment your busine ss in a
logical way to facilitate
planning, purchasing,
receiving, and other
business requirements.

y
l
n

4-22

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 24

Multiple Organization Overview


Multiple Organization Overview
An organization has a set of books, a costing method,
and a valid list of items. Organizations can have
multiple classifications and multiple locations.
Reasons for multiple organizations include:
Use of different costing methods within your
business
Need for different item usage and attribute control
for items not used in all organizations
Separation of inventory records among the
organizations

y
l
n

4-23

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 25

Defining Approved Suppliers


Defining Approved Suppliers
An Authorized Supplier List (ASL) is:
A repository of information that links items and
commodities to the suppliers/supplier sites
Assigns and stores statuses to item/supplier site
combinations
Defines attributes for an ASL entry that control
Purchasing and Supplier Scheduling functions

y
l
n

4-24

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 26

Approved Suppliers List Overview


Approved Suppliers List Overview

Approved
Supplier List

Commodity

Ship-to
organization or
global organizations

Items

Supplier site

y
l
n

4-25

ASL Overview
The Approved Supplier List is a repository of information that links items and
commodities to the supplier and supplier sites that supply them, for a specific
ship-to organization or the entire enterprise.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 27

Rules to Specify Preferred Suppliers: Sourcing Rules


Rules to Specify Preferred Suppliers:
Sourcing Rules
Used to specify preferred suppliers, distributors,
and manufacturers Link the primary supplier item
number with your internal item number
Define replenishment sources for an organization
May be defined in Oracle Planning, Oracle
Purchasing, Oracle Supply Chain Planning, or
Oracle Supplier Scheduling
Use allocation percentages and rankings for
multiple sources

y
l
n

4-26

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 28

For More Information


For More Information
Oracle Internet Procurement:
http://www.oracle.com/applications/internet
procurement/index.html

Oracle Web Supplier Portal:


http://www.oracle.com/applications/internet
procurement/index.html
(Click on Promote And Leverage Supplier Efficiencies)

Oracle Purchasing Intelligence:


http://www.oracle.com/applications/internet
procurement/index.html
(Click on Reduce and Control Procurement Costs)

y
l
n

4-27

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 29

Summary

Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to
identify the setup steps and considerations that are
required for Supplier management.

y
l
n

4-28

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 30

Practice: Creating a New Supplier


Task
Creating a New Supplier

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Purchasing, Vision Operations (USA) or Payables,
Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Supplier Entry

Supplier Header -

Supplier Name: XX My Supplier (NOTE: XX= your student number)

In the Classification Tab set the Supplier Type: Supplier (this field is for
reporting only)

Select the Classification Tab select the small business check box.

In the Payment Tab set the Payment Terms: Immediate

In the Payment Tab enter a payment priority equal to your student


number

In the Control Tab set the Invoice Match Option to Purchase Order

Supplier Site -

Click on the Sites button. Enter a unique site name and address( the
address fields are important and will be required in class). Record your
site name below.

Within the site, select the Contact Tab and enter the name of the person
you would like to talk to when ordering from your site (i.e. John Smith,
Heather Locklear)

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

y
l
n

Enter a second site by placing your cursor in the supplier SITE NAME
field and by hitting the down arrow on the keyboard. Then enter the
address and contact information for this additional site. Record your site
name below.
Save your work.
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 31

Site Name #1 _______________________


Site Name #2 _______________________

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Suppliers
Chapter 4 - Page 32

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 1

s
U

Oracle Purchasing

Oracle Purchasing

Module 5

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 2

s
U

Objectives

Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to do
the following:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Purchasing
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Purchasing

y
l
n

O
e

5-2

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 3

s
U

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-3

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 4

s
U

Product Integration Overview

Product Integration Overview


e-Commerce Gatew ay

Oracle Self Service


Purchasing

Oracle
Inventory

Oracle
Payables

Oracle
Master Scheduling/MRP

Oracle
General Ledger

Oracle
Order Management

Oracle
Supplier Scheduling

Oracle
Work in Process

Oracle
Assets

Oracle
Purchasing

Oracle
Hum an Resources
Oracle
Project Accounting

Oracle
Bill of Material
Oracle
Cost Management

O
e

y
l
n

5-4

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 5

s
U

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-5

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 6

s
U

Why Purchase Requisitions?

Why Purchase Requisitions?


Purchase requisitions allow you to decentralize
your purchasing department by having requesters
Purchase requisitions allow you to source your
requisition with the best suppliers and at the lowest
cost
Purchase requisitions ensure that the appropriate
manage ment approval is given before purchase
orders are created.

y
l
n

O
e

5-6

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 7

s
U

Where Purchase Requisitions Fit

Where Purchase Requisitions Fit


Demand

Inventory

WIP

MRP

Order Mgmt

Import/reschedule
requisitions

Internal
sales order

Order entry

Supplier
Manually
create

Approval

O
e

5-7

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

y
l
n

Requisition
pool

Requisition

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 8

s
U

Oracle Purchasing Purchase Requisitions

Oracle Purchasing Purchase Requisitions


The Oracle Purchasing enables you to:
Create, edit and review requisitions online.
Review status and action history of your
requisitions.
Automatically source requisitions from open
blanket purchase agreements and quotations.
Utilize requisition templates for items you purchase
frequently.
Create internal requisitions.
Distribute expenses across multiple cost centers.

y
l
n

O
e

5-8

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 9

s
U

Information Flow for Purchase Requisitions

Information Flow for Purchase


Requisitions
Oracle MRP
Requirements

Suppliers
Oracle Inventor y
Subinventory
Replenishment

Oracle WIP
Outside Processing

Purchase
Requisition
Process
Purchase
Orders

Oracle Order Mgmt

y
l
n

Drop Shipments

O
e

5-9

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 10

s
U

Access Levels

Access Levels
Action

Quotation

Purchase
Order

Requisition

View Only
View
Modify

Change

View

y
l
n

Full
Change

View

Cancel or Final Close

5-10

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 11

s
U

O
e

Options for Security, Approval Limits, and Approval Routing

Options for Security, Approval Limits, and


Approval Routing
Security by document type and action
Approvals by position or job and then:

Document type
Document total
Charge account number range
Items, categories, locations

Can use either employee-to-supervisor routing or


hierarchy routing
Document security and approval to meet your
business needs

O
e

y
l
n

5-11

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 12

s
U

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-12

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 13

s
U

Overview of a Request for Quotation

Overview of a Request for Quotation


Request for Quotation

Suppliers from
supplier list

Header information

Supplier 1

Doc. type, ship-to, bill-to


Quote effective date

Line information
Quantity

Supplier 2

Unit of measure

Enter
RFQ

Target price

Min/max quantities
Terms and conditions
Supplier 3

Hazardous materials

y
l
n

Multiple shipment quotations

O
e

5-13

s
U

Request for Quotation


A request for quotation (RFQ) is a document you use to solicit supplier quotations for those
goods or services. Not all purchase requisitions require an RFQ, and you do not need a
purchase requisition to create an RFQ. However, if the RFQ required check box is selected on
a requisition, an RFQ is required for that requisition.
Supplier Lists
Although you may send an RFQ to one supplier, usually you will want to send a request for
quotation to many suppliers to ensure that you get the best price and terms possible. With
Oracle Purchasing you create supplier lists so that you can predefine groups of suppliers to
whom you want to send RFQs. You can establish supplier list according to criteria you define,
such as item, manufacturing category, geographic location or more.

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 14

Sourcing Rules Overview

Sourcing Rules Overview


Effective : 01-JAN-9731-DEC-03

Supplier A
60 %
Rank 1

Supplier B
40 %
Rank 1

Supplier C
100 %
Rank 2

Effective : 01-JAN-04

Supplier C
100 %
Rank 2

Supplier A
100 %
Rank 1

O
e

y
l
n

5-14

s
U

Sourcing Rules Overview


Sourcing Rules let you define relationships between the ASL and your business rules for
sourcing items and commodities. Sourcing defaults can dramatically increase operational
efficiency.
Automatically allocate planned orders across different suppliers using percentage splits.
Define global or local rules for individual items and entire commodities.
Maintain sourcing details at supplier and/or site.
Define effectivity dates for each rule.
Assign sourcing rules at different levels using an assignment set.
Classify and rank multiple sources.
Sourcing rules define replenishment sources for an organization or a groups of organizations
which can then be applied to specific items. Sourcing rules that are made up of multiple
suppliers, allow you to assign allocation percentages to each supplier and rank them if the
percentages are equal.

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 15

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-15

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 16

s
U

Purchase Order Process

Purchase Order Process


Create
Purchase Orders
Automatic
Purchase Orders
Manage & Approve
Purchase Orders
Review PO
Information

Purchase
Orders

y
l
n

Evaluate
Purchasing

O
e

5-16

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 17

s
U

Process Inputs and Outputs

Process Inputs and Outputs

Process

Key Inputs

Key Outputs

Overall

Internal demand

Fulfilled order

External demand
Ordering Requisition

Purchase order

Supplier catalog

Blanket order release

Engineering specifications
Customer specifications

y
l
n

O
e

5-17

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 18

s
U

Where Purchase Orders Come From

Where Purchase Orders Come From


Oracle
MRP

Demand

Oracle
Inventory

Oracle
WIP

Other
systems

Import/reschedule
requisitions
Manually create

Approve

Requester
Source?

Create internal
sales order
Order
Management

Create supplier purchase order

y
l
n

O
e

5-18

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 19

s
U

Information Flow for Purchase Orders

Information Flow for Purchase Orders

Oracle MRP
Suppliers
Oracle Inventor y

Oracle WIP

Purchase
Order
Process
Purchase
Orders

y
l
n

External systems

O
e

5-19

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 20

s
U

Purchase Order Management Interfaces

Purchase Order Management Interfaces

Requisition import
E-commerce gateway
Purchase release
Open document interface

y
l
n

O
e

5-20

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 21

s
U

E-Commerce Capabilities

E-Commerce Capabilities
Order import enhancements:
Error correction form s
Import of returns
Price and payment terms validation

New EDI transactions:


Inbound order changes (860/ORDCHG)
Outbound order acknowledgments (855/865/ORDRSP)

XML enabled

y
l
n

O
e

5-21

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 22

s
U

Overview of Purchase Order Creation

Overview of Purchase Order Creation


You select the appropriate purchase order document
type for your needs:
Standard purchase order
Contract purchase order
Blanket purchase agreement
Planned purchase order

y
l
n

O
e

5-22

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 23

s
U

Overview of Purchase Order Maintenance

Overview of Purchase Order Maintenance


To maintain your purchasing documents, you can:

Print purcha se orders


Archi ve purcha se orders
Modify purcha se orders
Enter and view purchase order acceptances

When you change a purchase order, Purchasing


automatically increments the revision and in many
cases requires document reapproval
You can modify the purchase order status (cancel,
close, hold, delete, and so on)

y
l
n

O
e

5-23

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 24

s
U

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to enter a
purchase order.

y
l
n

O
e

5-24

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 25

s
U

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-25

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 26

s
U

Receiving in Oracle Purchasing

Receiving in Oracle Purchasing


Receiving is a transaction that signals that the
goods ordered on a purchase order have arrived.
Oracle Purchasing allows the following methods of
receiving:
Standard receipt
Direct receipt
Inspection required

y
l
n

O
e

5-26

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 27

s
U

Agenda

Agenda

Purchasing integration
Requisitions
RFQs and sourcing rules
Purchase orders
Receiving
Setup

y
l
n

O
e

5-27

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 28

s
U

Required Setup Steps for Oracle Purchasing

Required Setup Steps for


Oracle Purchasing
Set Up Approval
Information
Define Lookups
Define Purchasing
Options
Define Buyers
Define Line Types
Purcha sing Database
Admini stration
Define Financial Options

y
l
n

O
e

5-28

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 29

s
U

Purchasing Accounting Considerations

Purchasing Accounting Considerations


Journal
entries

Purchase
Order

Purcha sing transactions


that create journal entries
Transfer of purcha sing
journal entries to General
Ledger
Controlling transaction
accounting periods
Using multiple currencies
Foreign currency journal
entries

y
l
n

Using foreign
currency

O
e

5-29

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 30

s
U

Overview of Purchasing Period-End Accrual Cycle

Overview of Purchasing Period-End


Accrual Cycle
Receiving transactions
Invoices matched and entered
Accounts pa yable period closed

Close the
purchasing period

1. Run Receipt
AccrualPeriod End 2. Run Oracle
Process
General Ledger 3. Run Accrual
Journal Import
Rebuild
Process
Reconciliation
Report

5-30

Analyze and
write-off
discrepancies

y
l
n

s
U

O
e

An important example of interaction between Oracle Purchasing and Oracle General Ledge
that may influence accrual setup decisions during implementation.

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 31

Accounting Implementation Considerations

Accounting Implementation
Considerations
Issues to consider:
Interface processing
Integration issues

y
l
n

O
e

5-31

s
U

Interface processing
How often will your general ledger and Oracle Purchasing interface?
How will currency exchange rates be updated?
Integration issues
What requirements of the Purchasing, Treasury, and Finance departments must be
considered?

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 32

Inventory Setup Requirements

Inventory Setup Requirements

Defining inventory organizations


Defining locations
Units of measure
Item setup
Item attribute controls
Defining item attributes
Status codes

y
l
n

O
e

5-32

s
U

Organizational Management Overview is an Using Oracle HRMS - The Fundamentals topic


or available as a Help topic available from:
(Help) Oracle HRMS > Organizational Management > Organizational
Management Overview

&
l
a

I
A
O

Also see Organization Parameters Window is an Oracle Inventory Users Guide topic or
available as a Help topic available from:
(Help) Oracle Inventory > Setting Up > Organization Parameters Window

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 33

Inventory Implementation Considerations

Inventory Implementation Considerations


Issues to consider:
Numbering conventions
Item conversion
Data mapping
Data cleanup
Item maintenance
Integration issues

y
l
n

O
e

5-33

s
U

Numbering conventions
- What numbering conventions will be used to create items? To avoid duplicate item
entries, the naming convention style must be congruent.
- What will be your Key Flexfield definitions?
- Will you use single or multiple segments?
- Will you use value sets for certain segments?
Item conversion
- What methodology will be used to convert your current item data into Oracle
Purchasing?
- Will you have automated conversion, manual data entry, or both?
Data mapping
- How will your data mapping be done?
- What data in legacy system will determine values in Oracle Purchasing tables?
- How will additional fields be derived and loaded?
Data clean up

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 34

How will current item descriptions be standardized?


How will duplicate or inactive items be eliminated during the conversion?
Item maintenance
- Who will maintain item data?
- Delays could occur if items are not established promptly.
- How will engineering, costing, planning, order entry, and other data be gathered and
input?
Integration issues
- What are the requirements of the Inventory, Purchasing Engineering, Internal Auditing,
and Planning and Accounting departments which must be considered?

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 35

s
U

Purchasing Options

Purchasing Options

Default Options
Accrual Options
Control Options
Internal Requisition Options
Numbering Options
Tax Defaults Options

y
l
n

O
e

5-34

s
U

(N) Setup > Organization > Purchasing Options


Defining Purchasing Options is an Oracle Purchasing Users Guide topic or available as a
Help topic available from:
(Help) Oracle Purchasing > Setting Up > Defining Purchasing Options

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 36

Financial Options

Financial Options

Accounting
Supplier - Purchasing
Tax defaults in Tax region
Other tabbed regions may also be required

y
l
n

O
e

5-35

s
U

Financial Options
(N) Setup > Organization > Financial Options
Defining Financial Options is an Oracle Payables Users Guide topic or available as a Help
topic available from:
(Help) Oracle Payables > Payables Setup > Financial Options > Defining
Financial Options

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 37

Requisition Implementation Considerations

Requisition Implementation
Considerations

Requisition sources
Requisition usage
Requisition conversion
Data mapping
Interface processing
Integration issues

y
l
n

O
e

5-36

s
U

Requisition sources
- What sources will provide requisitions? Examples include: Self Service entry, online
entry, Oracle Inventory, Oracle MRP, Oracle WIP, External Systems..
Requisition usage
- Will requisitions be required for all procurements?
Requisition conversion
- Will conversion occur or will open requests be completed on the legacy system?
- Will you have automated conversion, manual data entry, or both?
Data mapping
- How will your data mapping be done?
- What data in legacy system will determine values in Oracle Purchasing tables?
- How will additional fields be derived and loaded?
Interface processing
- How often will ReqImport be processed for each interface?
- What controls will exist to ensure data accuracy and completeness?

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 38

Integration issues
- What are the requirements of the Planning and Inventory Control, and Purchasing
departments which must be considered?

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 39

s
U

Purchase Order Implementation Considerations

Purchase Order Implementation


Considerations

Use of purchase orders


Conversion of purchase orders
Data mapping
Data cleanup
Integration issues

y
l
n

O
e

5-37

I
A
O

s
U

Purchase order usage


- What types of purchase orders will be used in the procurement strategy?
Purchase order conversion
- Will conversion occur or will open purchase orders be completed on the legacy system?
- Will you have automated conversion, manual data entry, or both?
Data mapping
- How will your data mapping be done?
- What data in legacy system will determine values in Oracle Purchasing tables?
- How will additional fields be derived and loaded?
Data cleanup
- Will closed purchase orders be converted?
Integration issues
- What are the requirements of the Purchasing, Payables, Planning, Auditing, Accounting
and Receiving departments which must be considered?

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 40

Receiving Implementation Considerations

Receiving Implementation Considerations


Issues to consider:
Advanced shipment notices (ASN)
Payment on receipt
Lot and serial number tracking
RMAs
Receipt conversion
Interface processing
Integration issues

y
l
n

O
e

5-38

I
A
O

s
U

Advanced shipment notices (ASN), Payment on receipt, Lot and serial number tracking, RMAs
Will they be used?
Receipt conversion
How will conversion of goods received but not yet delivered be conversion occur?
Will you have automated conversion, manual data entry, or both?
Interface processing
Will receiving transactions be initiated from an external system? Example: Data entry from
a scanning device.
Integration issues
What are the requirements of the Purchasing, Payables, Inventory Control, Auditing,
Planning, and Quality Control departments which must be considered?

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 41

Summary

Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Purchasing
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Purchasing

y
l
n

O
e

5-39

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 42

s
U

Practice: Create a Purchase Order


Task
Create a Purchase Order

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Purchasing, Vision Operations USA
(N) Purchase Orders > Purchase Orders
PO _____________, Amount = _____________

Supplier = XX My Supplier (From the create a Supplier practice 4-1)

Site = Second Site

Ship To = Seattle

Tab to the Item block and enter MS21662 as the item you are purchasing. The system
will default in the MISC.MISC category and Pens description.

Quantity = 50

Change the Price to $100.00

Select the Shipment button, enter the following shipments:


Ship to
Seattle
Seattle
Seattle

y
l
n

QTY
18
12
20

I
A
O

O
e

s
U

Need By Date
One week from today
Two weeks from today
Three weeks from today

&
l
a

n
r
te

The 20 units for the third shipment line have been ordered by two different departments. The
quantity ordered by each department and charge account are:
Destination Type
Expense
Expense

l
c
a

n
I
e

r
O

Quantity
12
8

Charge Account
01-402-7520-0000-000
01-404-7520-0000-000

After shipment line 3, Choose Distribution.

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 43

Enter the distribution line for this PO line.

Save your work and close the windows until the Purchase Order Header is displayed.

Approve the PO

Note PO Number and amount _______________________________

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Purchasing
Chapter 5 - Page 44

s
U

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 1

Oracle Payables

Oracle Payables

Module 6

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to do
the following:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Payables
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Payables

y
l
n

6-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 3

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of Oracle Payables


Invoice processing
Payment processing
Period closing
Tax accounting

y
l
n

6-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 4

Overview of Oracle Payables


Overview of Oracle Payables
Oracle Payables is a high-productivity accounting
solution that helps you maintain strong financial
controls. You can:
Maximize supplier discounts
Prevent duplicate payments
Pay for only the goods and service s that you order and
receive

Oracle Payables also helps you resolve business


issues quickly by providing accurate responses to
your inquiries.

y
l
n

6-4

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 5

Oracle Product Integration


Oracle Product Integration

Human
Resources

Cash
Management

Projects

e-Commerce
Gateway

Workflow
Payables

Property
Manager

iExpense
Purchasing

Assets

General Ledger

y
l
n

6-5

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 6

Oracle Payables Integration


Oracle Payables Integration
Oracle Human Resources shares locations and
employees with Oracle Payables.
Oracle Projects imports invoice information from
Payables to track project costs and exports expense
report information to Oracle Payables.
Oracle Cash Management reconciles payments
created in Oracle Payables to your bank statements.
Oracle e-Commerce Gateway transfers electronic
invoices and EDI payments to Oracle Payables.

y
l
n

6-6

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 7

Oracle Payables Integration


Oracle Payables Integration
Oracle Property Manager exports lease payment
information to Oracle Payables where you can pay
the lease invoices.
Oracle iExpenses can be used by employees to
enter their own expense reports.
Oracle Workflow can be set up to process invoice
records before you import them from the Payables
Open Interface.
Oracle General Ledger and other general ledger
systems receive invoice and payment accounting
entries from Oracle Payables.

y
l
n

6-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 8

Oracle Payables Integration


Oracle Payables Integration
Oracle Assets and other fixed assets systems
record Payables invoice distributions for asset
purchases.
Oracle Purchasing and other purchasing systems
share purchase orders and suppliers with Payables.

y
l
n

6-8

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 9

Five Major Processes


Five Major Processes
Oracle Payables contains five major processes:
1. Setting up suppliers
2. Entering and approving invoices
3. Paying invoices
4. Creating accounting entries
5. Sending transactions to the general ledger

y
l
n

6-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 10

Oracle Payables Processes


Oracle Payables Processes
Enter
supplier

Approve
invoice

Enter
invoice

Pay invoice

A/ P
100,000
60,000
10,000
30,000

Transfer
information to
General Ledger

Create
accounting
entries

y
l
n

6-10

There are two processes in Payables that you must complete for the data to be
sent to Oracle General Ledger:
1. The Payables Accounting process creates the accounting entries in Oracle
Payables.
2. The Payables Transfer to General Ledger sends the accounting transactions to
the GL Interface.
The Journal Import process moves the information from the GL Interface table
to the General Ledger tables. You can submit this program from Payables or
General Ledger.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 11

Flow of Default Values


Flow of Default Values
Financials options

Payables options

Supplier

Supplier site

Invoice

Invoice distribution line

Invoice scheduled payment line

y
l
n

6-11

Oracle Payables contains a hierarchy of options and defaults to expedite and


control data entry.
Options and defaults set at one level automatically cascade down to the next
lower level in the hierarchy for any new transactions.
Although you need to define these options and defaults only once, you can
update them at any time to change controls and defaults for future transactions.
You can override options and defaults at lower levels in the hierarchy.
This hierarchy is not always used. For example, with the tax defaults hierarchy,
you can decide the order in which tax values default.
See: Invoices>Taxes on Invoices>Defaulting Tax in Payables

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 12

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of Oracle Payables


Invoice processing
Payment processing
Period closing
Tax accounting

y
l
n

6-12

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 13

Entering Invoices: Overview


Entering Invoices: Overview
Enter
supplier

Approve
invoice

Enter
invoice

Pay invoices

Optionally
match to PO
or receipt
A/ P
100,000
60,000
10,000
30,000

Transfer
information to
General Ledger

Create
accounting
entries

y
l
n

6-13

There are two processes in Payables that you must complete for the data to be
sent to Oracle General Ledger:
1. The Payables Accounting process creates the accounting entries in Oracle
Payables.
2. The Payables Transfer to General Ledger sends the accounting transactions to
the GL Interface.
The Journal Import process moves the information from the GL Interface table
to the General Ledger tables. You can submit this program from Payables or
General Ledger.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 14

Oracle Payables Invoice Types


Oracle Payables Invoice Types
Type
Standard

Description
An invoice from a supplier representing an
amount due for goods or services purchased
(standard invoices can be matched to either a
PO or receipt, or not matched)

Credit Memo

A memo from a supplier representing a credit


amount toward goods or services for which you
have already been invoiced

Debit Memo

An invoice you enter to record a credit for a


supplier who does not send you a credit memo

Expense
Report

An invoice representing an amount due to an


employee for business-related expenses

PO Default

An invoice you enter for matching to a purchase


order (you enter a PO number, and Oracle
Payables automatically provides supplier
information)

y
l
n

6-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 15

Oracle Payables Invoice Types


Oracle Payables Invoice Types
Type
Prepayment

Description
A type of invoice you enter to pay an advance
payment for expenses to a supplier
or employee
An invoice you enter for matching to a purchase
order (you enter a PO number, and Oracle
Payables automatically provides supplier
information and matches to each shipment on
the purchase order)

QuickMatch

Withholding
Tax
Mixed

An invoice you enter to remit taxes withheld to


the appropriate tax authority
An invoice for which you can perform both
positive and negative matching to
purchase orders and to other invoices

y
l
n

6-15

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 16

Invoice Distribution Types


Invoice Distribution Types

Type

Description

Item

Records the amount a supplier charges for


goods or services purchased

Tax

Records the sales or other tax amount due


on goods or services purchased

Freight

Records the amount a supplier charges for


shipping and handling

Miscellaneous

Records the amount for miscellaneous


expenses on an invoice

y
l
n

6-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 17

Invoice Distribution Types


Invoice Distribution Types

Type

Description

Withholding

Records the amount of taxes withheld from


an invoice

Prepayment

Records the amount of a prepayment


applied to an invoice

y
l
n

6-17

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 18

Approving Invoices: Overview


Approving Invoices: Overview
Batch invoices

Enter invoice

Approve invoice

Optionally
match to PO
or receipt

View invoice

Receive invoices
in the mail
Create
accounting
A/P
100,000

Pay invoice
File invoice

60,000
10,000
30,000

y
l
n

6-18

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 19

Approving Invoices
Approving Invoices
Before you can pay or account for an invoice
(including prepayments), you must submit approval
for the invoice in one of three ways:
Online by using the Actions window of the Invoice
Workbench
Online by using the Approve button in the Invoice
Batches window
Batch by submitting the Payables Approval program
from the Submit Request window

y
l
n

6-19

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Invoices >
Approval > Approval

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 20

Accounting for Invoices


Accounting for Invoices
You submit the Payables Accounting process to
create accounting entries in Payables. Submit this
batch process from the Submit Request window.
You can also create accounting entries for an
invoice from the related Actions window.
Select the invoice.
Click the Actions button.
Select the Create Accounting check box, and click OK.

To account for an invoice batch, query the batch in


the Invoice Batches window, and then click the
Create Accounting button.

y
l
n

6-20

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 21

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to Process an
invoice

y
l
n

6-21

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 22

Overview of Expense Reporting


Overview of Expense Reporting
Approved: Create
Payment and
Notify Employee
Employee Creates Manager Reviews
Expense Report
Expense Report
Online

Manager Approved:
Accounts Payable
Reviews Report

Report Rejected: Workflow


Notifies Employee

Adjusted: Create
Payment and
Notify Employee

y
l
n

6-22

1. Employee creates and submits expense report using either the standard (web
browser) or disconnected (Excel spreadsheet) expense reporting methods.
2. Workflow notifies the employees manager (or the overriding approver, if
specified). Manager/approver reviews the expense report online.
3. If rejected: Employee is notified via email. Depending on the rejection
reason, employee may be able to modify report and resubmit using the Modify
Expense Reports option on the Internet Expenses main menu.
If approved: Report is sent for review by the Accounts Payable department
(only required if the report contains expenses that require original receipts
and/or justification; if not, the report receives AP approval automatically and
payment is created). If required receipts are missing or policy is violated, AP
clerk adjusts the report using the AP Expense Reports window and employee is
notified of the adjustment.
4. Once approved by management and (if required) the accounts payable
department, the AP Invoice Import program converts the expense report into an
invoice, and payment is created in Oracle Payables.
5. Employee receives payment via check or direct deposit, depending on
company policy/setup.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 23

Setting Up Invoice Payables Options


Setting Up Invoice Payables Options
Invoice Payables options include the following:
Use Batch Controls
Confirm Date as Invoice Number
Allow Online Approval
Allow Adjustments to Paid Invoices
Recalculate Scheduled Payment
Allow Document Category Override
Automatically Create Freight Distribution

y
l
n

6-23

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Payables Options > Payables Options Window Reference > Invoice
Payables Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 24

Invoice-Matching Considerations
Invoice-Matching Considerations
The Invoice Match Option exists at the following
levels: supplier, supplier site, and purchase order
shipment lines. Ensure that the matching option,
Purchase Order or Receipt, is set at the appropriate
level.

y
l
n

6-24

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Payables Options > Payables Options Window Reference >
Matching Payables Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 25

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to match a
vendor invoice to a purchase order

y
l
n

6-25

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 26

Prepayment Considerations
Prepayment Considerations
You need to determine if any additional payment
terms are needed for prepayments.
You can optionally set up default payment terms to
be specified for prepayments during the Payables
Options setup.

y
l
n

6-26

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Payables Options > Payables Options Window Reference >
Matching Payables Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 27

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of Oracle Payables


Invoice processing
Payment processing
Period closing
Tax accounting

y
l
n

6-27

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 28

Issuing Payments: Overview


Issuing Payments: Overview
Enter supplier

Enter invoice

Approve invoice

Pay
invoice
A/P
100,000

Transfer
information
to general ledger

60,000
10,000
30,000

Create accounting
entries

y
l
n

6-28

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 29

Payment Features
Payment Features
Oracle Payables provides a variety of features for fast,
controlled payment processing. With Oracle Payables,
you can:
Use different payment methods to disburse funds
Ensure that duplicate invoice payments never occur
Pay only invoices that are due, and automatically
take the maximum discount available
Automatically create groups of payments for
invoices that meet the criteria you select

y
l
n

6-29

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 30

Payment Features
Payment Features
Use custom payment formats
Choose from different payment method options,
including checks, electronic data interchange (EDI),
electronic funds transfer (EFT), and wires
Record stop payments
Void payments
Review payment status and payment information

y
l
n

6-30

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 31

Oracle Payables Payment Methods


Oracle Payables Payment Methods
Payment
Method

Definition

Check

A printed paper remittance document that is


sent to a supplier

Clearing

A record of payment for invoices transferred


from another entity within the company without
creating a payment document

Electronic

An electronic funds transfer to a suppliers bank

Wire

A funds transfer initiated by contacting your


bank and requesting a wire payment to a
suppliers bank

y
l
n

6-31

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 32

Future-Dated Payments
Future-Dated Payments
Future-dated payments (also known as bills of
exchange or notes payable) are payment documents
that instruct your bank to disburse funds on a
specific datethe maturity date.
The difference between future-dated payments and
standard payments is that on standard payments
the payment date, the creation date, and the date
when funds are available are usually all the same.

y
l
n

6-32

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Payments


> Future Dated Payments > Future Dated Payments

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 33

Payment Batches: Overview of the Steps


Payment Batches: Overview of the Steps
Select invoices
-------------------------(Build payments)

Format
payments

Print checks or
create electronic
payments

Confirm
payments

y
l
n

6-33

You follow a series of steps to create your payment batches , and you initiate
each step from the Payment Batch Actions window.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 34

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to process a
payment batch.

y
l
n

6-34

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 35

Accounting for Payments


Accounting for Payments
You submit the Payables Accounting Process to
create accounting entries in Oracle Payables. Submit
this batch process from the Submit Request window.
You can also create accounting entries for a payment
or payment batch from the related Actions window.
1. Select the payment or payment batch.
2. Click the Actions button.
3. Select the Create Accounting check box, and
click OK.

y
l
n

6-35

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 36

Cash Control Features


Cash Control Features
Business Needs Features
Prioritize and categorize
payments

Pay Group
Payment Priority

Control pa yment of invoices

Holds

Reduce cash outla ys

Discount
Credit and debit invoices

Forecast cash needs

Cash Requirements Report

Require special handling for an


invoice payment

Pay- alone

y
l
n

6-36

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 37

Defining Pay Groups


Defining Pay Groups
A pay group is a feature you use to select invoices
for payment in a payment batch. You can define a
pay group and assign it to one or more suppliers.
Define a pay group with a descriptive name, for
example, Utilities or Employees.
Define a default pay group for all suppliers, for an
individual supplier, or for a supplier site.

y
l
n

6-37

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 38

Defining Payment Terms


Defining Payment Terms
Assign payment terms to an invoice to automatically
create scheduled payments for the invoice with due
dates and any discounts.
You can set up payment terms to default from the
Financials Options, supplier, and supplier site
levels.
You can assign a payment term name that helps
identify the payment term.
You can assign up to three discounts for each
payment line.

y
l
n

6-38

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Payment Terms > Payment Terms
The system does not have any predefined payment terms.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 39

Taking Invoice Discounts


Taking Invoice Discounts
Payables uses payment terms you assign to an
invoice to pay invoices at a discounted rate.
You can define discount payment terms that have
Payables vary the discount amount depending on
how old the invoice is. You also define the payment
terms to pay the full invoice amount if you have
missed the discount date.

y
l
n

6-39

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Invoices >
Discounts

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 40

Discount Reports
Discount Reports
Oracle Payables Discount Reports
Name

Description

Discounts Available
Report

Review invoice discount details for a


supplier or group of suppliers.
Use this report to identify payments
where you can take advantageous
discounts.

Discounts Taken
and Lost Report

Review discounts taken and lost for a


supplier or a group of suppliers for a
specified period of time
Review this report to determine whether
to modify s ystem and supplier defaults
to ensure that discounts are taken

y
l
n

6-40

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 41

Defining Banks
Defining Banks
Use the Banks window to enter bank information for
banks with which you do business. Oracle Receivables
and Oracle Payables share bank definitions, although
not all bank information is shared. Bank branches can
have multiple accounts, and each account you define
can be associated with Payables payment documents
and Receivables payment methods.

y
l
n

6-41

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Banks > Banks

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 42

Defining Banks
Defining Banks
You define payment documents for each internal bank
account. These payment documents have payment
formats associated with them which specify a payment
method of:
Check
Electronic
Wire
Clearing

y
l
n

6-42

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 43

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to setup a bank.

y
l
n

6-43

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 44

Setting Up Financials Options for Payments


Setting Up Financials Options for
Payments
The options that you define in the Supplier-Payables
tabbed region, except for the Receipt Acceptance
Days option, are used as default values for the
Payment region of the Suppliers window. The
supplier values default to new supplier sites for the
supplier, which default to new invoices for the
supplier site.
You can override these values during entry of the
supplier, supplier site, and invoice.

y
l
n

6-44

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Financial Options > Defining Financials Options > SupplierPayables

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 45

Setting Up Payables Options for Payments


Setting Up Payables Options for Payments
In the Payment tabbed region, you can set the
following defaults and options that will simplify
automatic payment processing:
Bank Account
Payment Batch Limit
EFT User Number
Additional Pay Through Days
Allow Document Category Override
Exclude Tax From Discount Calculation
Discount Method

y
l
n

6-45

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Setup >
Payables Options > Payables Options Window Reference >
Payment Payables Options

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 46

Setting Up Payables Options for Payments


Setting Up Payables Options for Payments

Allow Print
Allow Pre-Date
Allow Void and Reissue
Allow Address Change
Allow Remit-To Account Override
Use Bank Charges

y
l
n

6-46

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 47

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of Oracle Payables


Invoice processing
Payment processing
Period closing
Tax accounting

y
l
n

6-47

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 48

Overview of the Period Closing Process


Overview of the Period Closing Process

Review and
resolve AP issues

Reconcile AP
activity for
the period

Transfer to
General Ledger

Close the
period in AP

Review transfer
results, and resolve
transfer issues

Post journal
entries in GL

Move unresolved
issues to the
next period

y
l
n

6-48

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 49

Transferring Accounting Details to the General Ledger


Transferring Accounting Details to the
General Ledger
Submit the Payables Transfer to General Ledger
program to transfer the accounting entries from
Payables to the GL Interface table.

GL Interface table

Oracle Payables

y
l
n

6-49

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables >


Accounting > Transferring Accounting Entries to Your General
Ledger > Payables Transfer to General Ledger Program

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 50

Accounting and Reconciliation Reports


Accounting and Reconciliation Reports
Payables provides the following accounting and
reconciliation reports:
Accounts Payable Trial Balance Report
Payables Account Analysis Report
Payables Accounting Entries Report
Payables Accounting Process Report
Posted Invoice Register
Posted Payment Register
Unaccounted Transactions Report

y
l
n

6-50

(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Reports


and Programs > Accounting and Posting Reports > Posted Invoice
Register
(Help) Oracle Financial Applications > Oracle Payables > Reports
and Programs > Accounting and Posting Reports > Posted
Payment Register

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 51

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of Oracle Payables


Invoice processing
Payment processing
Period closing
Tax accounting

y
l
n

6-51

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 52

Overview of Tax in Oracle Applications


Overview of Tax in Oracle Applications
Oracle Applications support the following types of tax:
Value Added Tax
Recoverable and Non-Recoverable Input Taxes
EU Acquisition and Reverse Charge Taxes
Deferred Output Taxes
Withholding Taxes
US State and Local Taxes
Goods and Service Tax
Canadian Government, Provincial and Harmonized
Sales Tax

y
l
n

6-52

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 53

Overview of Tax in Oracle Applications


Overview of Tax in Oracle Applications
Oracle Applications support the following types of tax:
Sales Equalization Taxes
Investment Taxes
Excise Duties
Latin American Tax regimes (Brazilian ICMS, IPI,
Tributary Substitutions; Argentine VAT perception,
Turnover perception; Colombian VAT)

y
l
n

6-53

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 54

Global Taxes Overview


Global Taxes Overview
Tax regimes around the world differ in their
requirements. For example:
Value Added Tax (VAT) - Imposed on the value
added to goods or services at each stage of their
supply
Goods and Services Tax (GST) - Sales tax levied on
many consumer products and professional services

y
l
n

6-54

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 55

Tax/VAT Overview
Tax/VAT Overview
Output Tax

Input Tax

Tax paid out on


supplier invoices

Tax collected on
customer invoices

Amount Due to Tax Authority = Output Tax Recoverable Input Tax

y
l
n

6-55

(Help) Oracle Payables > Invoices > Taxes on Invoices > Entering
Taxes on Invoices
(Help) Oracle Receivables > Tax > Implementing Value Added Tax
- Input tax - What you pay your tax authority via supplier invoices.
- Output tax - What you receive from customers and then turn over to
your tax authority.
Oracle Order Management and Oracle Receivables process output tax,
which is charged on the supply of taxable goods and services, for example,
on customer invoices or revenue items. You should report output tax
whenever you account for sales.
Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Payables process input tax, which is charged
on the receipt of taxable goods and services, such as tax on supplier invoices
or expense items. You should report input tax whenever you account for
expenditures. Input tax is usually deductible.
Recoverable input tax is the portion of paid tax that you can recover against
the total charged tax.
- For most commercial/manufacturing organizations, the recovery rate is
usually 100%.
- For VAT-exempt organizations in fields such as public sector, health
care, and charity, the recovery rate can be 0%.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 56

- For other cases, partial recovery can be determined by the usage of the
goods. Oracle Application automates the selection of recovery rates for
the procure to pay process based on the asset/expense account, supplier
classification, tax code, and so on.
If your organization is VAT-registered and you receive an invoice from a
VAT-registered supplier site, you are required to pay VAT charges to the
supplier. There are situations in which you do not pay VAT but need to
report the charges to your tax authorities.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 57

Summary

Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Payables
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Payables

y
l
n

6-56

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 58

Practice: Invoice Matching to Purchase Order


Task
Invoice Matching to Purchase Order
You have now received the invoices for these Purchase Orders created in Practice
Define a Budget in the Purchasing module. Refer to that practice for applicable
P.O. numbers.
(N) Invoices > Invoices

Enter the following invoices:

Your supplier has shipped 26 units of the item you ordered and therefore has
billed you for them. The shipments were for the first and second shipment lines.
The rest of the PO is on back order and will be shipped and billed at a later date.

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Payables, Vision Operations (USA)

y
l
n

Invoice # PO111-XX

O
e

Type = PO Default

Enter the PO number

Date = Today

Amount = $2,600

Select the Match button. (Please verify that you are matching to a
Purchase Order)

When the Find window appears, click Find button.

You are now at the matching form. Verify that the shipment line 1 is for
18 units at $100.00 per box. Click on the far left checkbox to open the
shipment line.

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

In the next shipment line, enter the quantity invoiced for 8.


The invoice amount equals the PO amount

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 59

Select Match

Close the window

Verify the distribution total equals to the invoice amount.

Save your work.

Task
Invoice #PO222 -XX
Your supplier has shipped 5 more units of the item you ordered and therefore has
billed you for them. The shipments were for the second and third lines. The
remainder of the PO is back ordered and will be shipped and billed at a later date.

Solution

Type = Standard

Amount = $500

Select the Match button. (Please verify that you are matching to a
Purchase Order)

Select the Find button when the Find window is displayed

In the second shipment line, select the appropriate check box.

Enter the Quantity Invoiced as 2.

In the third shipment line, select the appropriate check box.

Enter the Quantity Invoiced as 3.

Note that the Distributions button is enabled, because the third shipment
line had multiple distributions.

Click Distribute.

In the Match to PO Distribution window, select the first distribution line


and enter the quantity invoiced as 2.

&
l
a

y
l
n

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

In the second distribution line, again select the appropriate check box.
Enter the quantity invoiced as 1 to cost center 404.

Choose OK. This will save your work and update the quantity billed
information.

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 60

Close the windows and verify that the distributions total equals the
invoice amount.

Task
Invoice # PO333-XX
Your supplier has finally shipped the remaining 19 units and therefore has billed
you for them. The shipment was for the balance of the second and third shipment
lines.

Solution

Type = Quickmatch

Your Supplier

Second Site (from B)

Todays Date

Amount = $1,900

Select the Match button.

You should be in the Match screen. The second shipment should have
12 ordered and 10 billed. The third line should have 20 ordered and 3
billed. On the second shipment line, you are now being invoiced for 2.
On the third shipment line, you are now being invoiced for 17.

Click the Match button.

Save your work.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 61

Practice: Defining a Bank


Task
Defining a Bank

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Payables, Vision Operations USA
(N) Setup >Payment > Banks
(XX = your student number)
Bank
Name:
XX Your Bank
Institution: Bank
Address: Make one up

If you do not enter a bank branch number, the system will not allow you
to create a positive Pay File.

y
l
n

Bank Accounts
Name:
Number:
Acct. Use:

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

01-000-1110-0000-000
01-000-1250-0000-000
01-740-7870-0000-000
01-740-7870-0000-000

n
I
e

l
c
a

XX Disbursements
XX452
Internal

O
e

Go to the GL Accounts Tab

GL Accounts
Cash:
Cash Clearing:
Bank Charges:
Bank Errors:

r
O

Bank Branch
Name: XX Your Branch
Number: XX 34

Press the PAYABLES DOCUMENTS button and fill in the fields listed
below:
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 62

(Please read this section DOWN rather than across)


XXChecking
Combined
Long Check Format
999
999999
0

Name
Disbursement Type
Payment Format
Last Used
Last Available
Set-up Checks

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 63

Practice: Creating a Payment Batch


Task
Creating a Payment Batch
You are now ready to set up a payment check in a payment batch. You need to
select the parameters of your batch and build the payment batch. Use the
following steps:

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Payables, Vision Operations USA

Payments Entry Payment Batches

Batch Name = Your initials and todays date

Bank = Your checking account (from the Define a Bank practice 6-2)

Document = Your document name (your check name) (from the Define a
Bank practice 6-2)

Leave the paygroup field blank

SELECT YOUR STUDENT ID AS THE PAYMENT PRIORITIES


(i.e. 12 to 12). If you do not change this, you will pay everyones
invoices.

Select the Actions button and accept defaults of Select Invoices and
Build Payments.

Request to print the Preliminary Report

Oracle Payables generated three requests; select the invoices, build the
payments, print the preliminary report.

View your Preliminary report

&
l
a

y
l
n

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

Task

r
O

Modify Batch
After reviewing the preliminary report, you realize you will need to modify this
batch
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 64

Solution

Requery your payment batch

Select the Actions button and uncheck the Format selection

Select the Modify Option

You will now be in the Modify Payment Batch form. Review the
invoices selected and remove one of your invoices from the batch ( you
decide which one)

Select the Done button

The system will now rebuild your payment batch to reflect the invoice
being removed

Monitor the concurrent requests window until the rebuild process is


completed.

Return to your Payment Batch and requery it.

Once you are satisfied with your payment batch you are ready to format
and print the checks. Select the Actions button and select Format and
Print.

y
l
n

Monitor the concurrent requests and once completed view the Format
Requests to see your printed checks

Note the last check number here ____________

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 65

O
e

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Payables
Chapter 6 - Page 66

Customers
Chapter 7

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 1

Customers

Customers

Module 7

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to
do the following:
Describe the process of creating and maintaining
customers in Oracle Applications
Identify the implementation considerations of
creating customers

y
l
n

7-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 3

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of customers
Profile classes
Customer entry
Customer relationships
Customer merge

y
l
n

7-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 4

Managing Customers

Managing Customers

Create customer
profile classes

Enter customer
information

Assign
customers to
profile classes

Review customer
information

Eliminate duplicate
information

Create customer
relationships

y
l
n

7-4

You can:
Create customer profile classes and assign them to customers
Create and maintain customer information
Enter multiple ship-to sites for each customer
Enable related customers to establish reciprocal payment and contract terms
Review customer information online and in reports
The system will perform a search for your customer before it allows you to
enter a new customer.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 5

What is the New Customer Model?

What is the New Customer Model?

Receivables

AR
Customer
Master

Customer
Form

Order Entr y

Customer
interface

Projects

Customer
merge

Customer Model Tables


(store Customers, Addresses, Bank Accounts, etc.)

y
l
n

7-5

The customer model is part of Oracle Receivables. It has tables that store
customer relationships and information about the people, organizations, and
locations involved in those relationships.
You interact with the customer model through the following modules:
Customer form: Online entry and query of customer information.
Customer interface: Batch load of customer information.
Customer merge: Merge customer accounts, usually after youve entered a
customer incorrectly or in duplicate or due to a business consolidation.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 6

New Customer Model Benefit


New Customer Model Benefit
You do not have to duplicate customer addresses
across operating units:
Create then once
Reference them across all operating units

y
l
n

7-6

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 7

Entities of the New Customer Model


Entities of the New Customer Model
Organization or person customer: A unique set of
truths about a person, organization, group, or
relationship.
Account: The financial rollup point from which to
track the monetary portion of a customers
purchases and payments.

y
l
n

7-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 8

New Customer Model

New Customer Model


Location
Contact Point

O.C.P
relationship type

O.C.P. site
O.C.P.

Group

External
Organization

Person

O.C.P
relationship

O.C.P. role in
relationship
Customer
relationship

O.C.P. =
Organization or
person customer

Customer
relationship
site

Internal
Organization

y
l
n

7-8

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 9

Organization or Person Customer Registry


Organization or Person Customer
Registry
An organization or person customer is anything that
an enter into business relationships with another
organization or person customer.
You can store information about your relationships
in one source of truth representation of people
and businesses.

y
l
n

7-9

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 10

Organization or Person Customer Relationships


Organization or Person Customer
Relationships
The registry stores information about relationships
between organizations or person customers:
Organizational hierarchies
Business relationships, for example, partnerships
Personal relationships, for example,
marriage/partnership and parenthood
Organization contacts

y
l
n

7-10

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 11

Customer Accounts
Customer Accounts
Customer accounts model relationships between an
organization deploying Oracle Applications and an
organization or person customer stored in the new
customer model registry.
Additional organizations or person customers can
play roles in accounts. The new account model
retains release 11i customer model features
including:
Credit profiles
Terms of relationship (for example, discount term s)
Customer bank accounts

y
l
n

7-11

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 12

Customer Accounts Link with Organization or Person


Customer

Customer Accounts Link with


Organization or Person Customer
Attributes at organization or person
customer registry level:
Name
Street address
Taxpayer identification
Industrial classifications
DUNS number
Parent/subsidiary relationships
External credit ratings

Big H
Denver, Colorado

Customer Account #A-123

Customer Account #B-123

Attributes at customer account level:


Payment terms
Shipping preferences
Billing preferences
Internal credit rating

y
l
n

7-12

O
e

In Release 11i, information about a customer is not separated from information


about the relationship with the customer. The new customer model separates
information about the organization or person customer from the terms of the
relationship.
Additionally, the new customer model allows you to establish multiple
relationships (also known as customer accounts) with the same organization or
person customer.
Addresses work in a similar fashion. You record an address for an organization
or person once, then reference it within the customer account layer, through the
Customer Account Site entity.

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 13

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of customers
Profile classes
Customer entry
Customer relationships
Customer merge

y
l
n

7-13

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 14

Profile Classes
Profile Classes
You can use profile classes to describe and group
customers with similar financial characteristics
Use profile classes to enter new customers quickly
and consistently

y
l
n

7-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 15

Customer Profile Class Characteristics

Customer Profile Class Characteristics


Credit/collections

Invoices and
Statements

Payment
promptness

Credit check
Collector
Payment
application
Dunning letters
Finance charges

Invoice line
and tax printing
Statement cycle
Consolidated
invoices

Payment terms
Discounts
Grace days

y
l
n

7-15

Creating Customer Profile Classes


To make the creation of new customers in Oracle Order Entry/Shipping/Oracle
Receivables efficient, every customer must be assigned to a profile class. A
profile class defines several default values for customers with similar credit
terms and invoicing requirements. After a customer has been created, the default
values can be modified based on the specific characteristics of that customer.
For example, you may want to create a profile class for small manufacturers,
called Small MFG. Customers assigned to this profile class might require credit
checks before orders will be fulfilled, given Net 30 payment terms, and receive
quarterly statements. When creating a specific new customer, you could assign
that customer to the Small MFG profile class. If the customer develops credit
problems in the future, you might then modify that customers payment terms to
Cash On Delivery.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 16

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of customers
Profile classes
Customer entry
Customer relationships
Customer merge

y
l
n

7-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 17

Customer Entry Methods

Customer Entry Methods


Enter complete
details

Enter limited
information

Import from
other systems

Standard
customer entry

Quick customer
entry

Customer
interface

y
l
n

7-17

Standard Customer Entry: Enter detail customer information such as contact


roles, telephone numbers, customers shipping preferences, taxing requirements,
financial information and addresses
Quick Customer Entry: Enter minimal customer information.
Customer Interfaces:
EDI transactions
External Systems
Order Import
Use the Quick Customer Entry to enter minimal customer information.
Note: You do not have the ability to specify a location code, a primary bill-to
or a primary ship-to.
All data added on the Quick Customer form is associated with the single address
only.
You can add more detailed information later using the Standard Customer entry.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 18

Business Issues
Business Issues
Before entering customer information, consider the
following:
Naming conventions
Entry method
Automatic or manual numbering
Profile classes
Centralized or decentralized address structures

y
l
n

7-18

Before Entering Customer Information:


Specify naming conventions such as capitalization and abbreviations.
Select the appropriate data entry method: Standard Customer Entry, Quick
Customer Entry, or Customer Interface.
Select the Automatic Customer Numbering and Site Numbering system
options and the Automatic Contact Numbering profile option to automatically
number customers, sites, and contacts; or select the manual numbering option.
Use the Allow Payment of Unrelated Invoices system option to permit
payment of unrelated customers invoices.
Decide how to set up decentralized customers with multiple sites: as one
customer with multiple sites, or as multiple customers with one site.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 19

Using Standard and Quick Customer Entry

Using Standard and Quick Customer


Entry
Customer

Addresses

Business Contacts Profile Characteristics


purpose
class

Telephone Bank Payment


numbers accounts method

Order
Management
information

Details
Accounting

y
l
n

7-19

Consider the following issues when setting up multiple business purposes:


Oracle Receivables/Order Management permits only one site to be designated
as the primary site for any particular business use.
The primary site becomes the default site when orders are entered in the Sales
Order window.
When you override the default site, the secondary sites appear in the list of
values.
Linking Bill To and Ship To Locations
A Ship To address can have an associated Bill To address.
The associated Bill To address becomes the default during invoice entry when
the Ship To location is selected.
If the Order Management Defaulting Rules refer to customer as a source, the
Bill To address defaults during order entry in the Orders window.
Identifying an Address for a Customer Business Purpose
The Location attribute in the Business Purposes alternative region of the
Customer Addresses window provides a simple way to name or identify an
address. Location is used in transaction entry, receipts entry, create/approve/
confirm automatic receipts and remittances, orders, and returns windows.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 20

To have Order Management automatically number locations, you can use the
Automatic Site Numbering system option. If you select the system option check
box, Order Management will uniquely number all the customer locations.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 21

Demonstration
Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to:
Define a new customer profile class
Enter a new customer

y
l
n

7-20

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 22

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of customers
Profile classes
Customer entry
Customer relationships
Customer merge

y
l
n

7-21

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 23

Customer Relationships
Customer Relationships
Create customer relationships to control:
Payment of unrelated invoices
Sharing of pricing entitlements
Consolidation of business addresses

y
l
n

7-22

Control Application of Payment Receipts


In the System Options window, if the Allow Payment of Unrelated Invoices
check box is clear, Order Management permits application of one customers
receipt to another customers invoice, only if the customer who owns the
invoice is related to the customer who owns the receipt. If Allow Payment of
Unrelated Invoices is selected, a relationship does not have to be defined.
Control Creation of Invoices Against Agreements and Commitments
Order Management permits creation of invoices for the related customer against
previously entered commitments for the primary customer, if there is a
relationship between the primary and related customers.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 24

Customer Relationships
Customer Relationships

Link one customer to another.


Enforce invoicing and receipt-application controls.
Can only exist between two customers.
Are not transitive: If A is related to B and B is
related to C, A and C are not related.
Can be reciprocal or nonreciprocal.
Allow you to select a related customers ship-to
address during order entry.

y
l
n

7-23

(N) Customers > Quick or Standard > (T) Relationships

O
e

(Help) (N) Oracle Receivables > Customers > Creating Customer


Relationships

I
A
O

s
U

Create customer relationships to control:


Payment of unrelated invoices
Sharing of pricing entitlements
Consolidation of business addresses
System Options:
Select check box Allow Payment of Unrelated Transactions if you want to
permit application of funds from one customer to another unrelated customer.
If you do not select this checkbox, a customer relationship must be setup to
apply payments from one customer to another.

&
l
a

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 25

Customer Relationship Examples

Customer Relationship Examples


Primary

Related

Related

Reciprocal

Primary

Nonreciprocal

Primary
(parent)

Related
(child)

y
l
n

7-24

Reciprocal and Nonreciprocal


A reciprocal relationship allows two customers to apply payments to each
others invoices and to match invoices against each others commitments. For
example, in the case of a parent company and a subsidiary, payments made by
either the parent company or the subsidiary could be applied to invoices issued
to the subsidiary or the parent.
A nonreciprocal relationship implies that only the primary customer can apply
payments or commitments to the related customers invoices. For example, in a
situation where a parent company is the primary customer and a subsidiary is a
related customer, payments made by the parent can be applied to invoices issued
to the subsidiary, but payments made by the subsidiary cannot be used to pay
invoices issued to the parent.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 26

Agenda

Agenda

Overview of customers
Profile classes
Customer entry
Customer relationships
Customer merge

y
l
n

7-25

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 27

Merge Overview
Merge Overview
Merging customer information combines all
information for two customer accounts or account
sites, striped by operating unit.
You can delete or inactivate the merge-from
customer account and account sites uses.
Before merging customers, consider archiving the
historical data for the absorbed customer account
or account site.

y
l
n

7-26

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 28

Controlling the Merge Process


Controlling the Merge Process
1. Navigate to the Merge Customers window.
2. You can save your selection without performing the
merge.
3. If you click Merge, you submit the Customer Merge
concurrent process and receive a request ID. The
merge process is irreversible after you click Merge.

y
l
n

7-27

(N) Customers > Merge

O
e

(Help) Oracle Receivables > Customers > Merging Customers


Control the Merge Process
If the From (previous) customer had a site use that does not exist for the To
(new) customer, the system leaves the To address blank. You must assign this
site use to the new customer before you complete the merge (Ship To, Bill To,
and Marketing only).
After entering the details of the merge, you can save your work to review the
merge before the transactions of the customer or sites are transferred. Or you
can immediately submit the merge for processing by clicking the Merge button.
After the customers are merged, the From (previous) customers transactions are
linked to the To (new) customer in Order Management and in any other Oracle
applications that use customer tables.
When merge processing is complete, Order Management automatically
generates a Customer Merge Execution report which can be printed or reviewed
online.
After customer data has been merged, there are no links between the previous
customer and its transaction records. These transactions appear as if they had
always belonged to the succeeding customer.

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 29

To automatically copy from addresses as to addresses, select Create Same Site.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 30

Summary
Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:
Describe the process of creating and maintaining
customers in Oracle Applications
Identify the implementation consideratons of
creating customers

y
l
n

7-28

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 31

Practice: Define a Customer Profile Class


Task
Define a Customer Profile Class

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
(USA ) or Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
Define a customer profile class that represents customers that are very good credit
risks.
(Example: Your Initials-VGCR)
(N) Customers > Profile Class

Name your profile class your initials -VGCR (ie . . . XXX-VGCR).

Click or tab to the Collector field and display a LOV and choose Jamie.

Set Credit Check = Yes. Tolerance = 0 . Payment Terms =


Net15. Override Terms = Yes

These customers will receive Statements on a Monthly basis and


Dunning Letters using the Standard Dunning Letter Set.

At times your customer remittances will not include invoices and you
prefer to have the system apply these receipts to the oldest item(s) on
your customers account, assign an AutoCash Rule Set of Standard.

Our company does not calculate interest (finance charges) on past due
amounts.

Assign any other values utilizing the LOV available.

Select Profile Class Amounts tab and assign limits for currency USD.

You will not be sending statements to this customer if their balance is


below $1,000. Type $1,000 in the Minimum Statement Amount.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

y
l
n

Assign a credit limit of $50,000 and an order limit of $35,000.

Save your profile class and record the name below:

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 32

CUSTOMER PROFILE CLASS: _________________________________

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 33

Practice: Entering a New Customer


Task
Entering a New Customer

Solution
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database
Responsibility > Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
(USA ) or Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
PART I (General information)
Your company has acquired a new customer we will call "Your Name, Inc."
(you may name your customer whatever you would like). Add the customer.
(N) Customers > Standard

In the Find/Enter screen, type the name of your customer. Click the Find
Button. The system will return a message stating the customer you
specified does not exist. Click the OK button. The New Button will
now be available. Click the New Button to proceed to the Customer
Standard Form

y
l
n

O
e

Assign the profile class you created in Practice 4-1. (Hint: Use
Classification Tab)

The category field should be High Technology.

Enter any of the other optional fields you want

Choose the tab named Profile: Transaction

Change the payment terms for this customer to Net 30.

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

PART II (Entering Addresses and Contacts)

n
I
e

The customer has 2 locations in Chicago for which they will be doing business
with you.

l
c
a

Select the Address Tab and then go to the detail window (by choosing
the New button).

Add an address for this customer. Use any street information you would
like, the city is Chicago, County is Cook and the Postal Code is 60601.

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 34

Choose Contacts: Telephones Tab

Add at least one contact with at least one phone number.

Save.

Put your cursor in the Country field and use your down arrow key to
obtain a blank address form.

Enter another address, contact and phone number following the above
instructions (this will be your second location in Chicago).

Save.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 35

PART III (Business Purpose)


You will send invoices and statements to one address and shipments to both. You
are assigning business reasons for these addresses. With the Customer Address
window still open:

Choose the Business Purpose Tab.

Establish the address displayed as both a primary Bill-To and a Ship-To


business purpose. For the Location field, type the street name so you
can identify it later.

Identify the other address you entered in Part II as a Ship-To business


purpose. For the location type the street name so you can identify it
later.

Save the record.

Whenever you ship to either of these addresses you will bill the primary
Bill-To Location. Establish this billing arrangement as the default for
both addresses you have entered. To do this, on the Ship to record
line, tab to the Bill To Location field and using the LOV, choose your
Bill-To Address.

Save the record

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Customers
Chapter 7 - Page 36

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 1

Oracle Order Management

Oracle Order Management

Module 8

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 2

Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to do
the following:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Order
Management
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Order Management

y
l
n

1-2

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 3

Agenda

Agenda
Overview of Order Management
Order processing
Customer returns
Implementation considerations
Shipping execution

y
l
n

1-3

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 4

Oracle Order Management Suite


Oracle Order Management Suite

Oracle Order Management (includes basic pricing)


Oracle Shipping Execution
Oracle Configurator
Oracle Advanced Pricing
Oracle Release Management and e-Commerce
Gateway
Customer, Carrier, Shipper, and Order Management
Portals

y
l
n

1-4

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 5

Basic Pricing (Part of OM)


Basic Pricing (Part of OM)
Basic pricing included in Order Management
enables you to:
Set up price lists and secondary li sts
Create static formula s
Di scount by percentage or amount
Apply freight charge s and surcharge s
Set up customer pricing agreements

y
l
n

1-5

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 6

Oracle Shipping Execution

(Packaged with OM)

Oracle Shipping Execution


(Packaged with OM)
Offers flexible, extensive shipment planning
capabilities
Over and under shipments

Provides for capturing freight and special charges


Permits Oracle Shipping Integration to UPS Online
Systems

y
l
n

1-6

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 7

Oracle Order Management Features


Oracle Order Management Features
Offers comprehensive processing of:

Orders
Returns
Mixed orders and returns
Drop Shipments

Performs order capture from any source using


Oracle e-Commerce Gateway
Has order pricing, change, copy, cancel and
monitoring capabilities

y
l
n

1-7

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 8

Order Management Interfaces


Order Management Interfaces

Order Import
e-Commerce Gateway
Purchase Release
Invoice Interface
Inventory Interface
Shipping Interface

y
l
n

1-8

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 9

Overview: Order Management Integration Points

Overview: Order Management Integration Points


GL

Inventory
Interface

Invoice

Oracle
Receivables
Invoice Interface

Oracle
Inventory
Move Orders,
Pick Release,
Pick Confirm Pick/Ship
APIs
Scheduling/
Sourcing API
Process Order API

Customer
Order Import,
Process Order API

Standard
Order
Process

Book
Order
Inventory

Enter Order

Schedule

y
l
n

1-9

Integration Points
Order Import: Brings in legacy orders, Inbound EDI, Internal Orders from
PO, note: validations are done by the Process Order API.
e-Commerce Gateway: Sends outbound EDI transactions 855 (Purchase
Order Acknowledgment) and 865 (PO Change Acknowledgment).
Purchase Release: Communicates externally sourced items from Order
Management to PO via Purchase Release API which feeds the Purchase
Release Interface.
Invoice Interface: Sends invoice and credit memo information.
Inventory Interface: Decrements inventory quantities at ship confirm.
Shipping Interface (External Systems): Accepts inbound disposition of
deliveries, transportation plans and more from other systems.
Shipping Execution: Communicates sales order line information.
Configurator: Inserts order lines from the configuration.
Customer Relationship Management: Accepts orders and order lines from
Order Capture for TeleSales, iService, and other modules. Order
Management calls Customer Relationship Management to pass installation
information.
Pricing: Inserts order lines for free goods and promotions.
Release Management: Processes orders and order lines.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 10

Shipping Execution: Sends freight cost, quantities, ship method and other
information.
Configure to Order: Sends the configured item number.
c-Commerce Gateway: Accepts order information from Process Order API
via the Order Import. Sends order information through Order Import to the
Process Order API.
Pricing: Prices and reprices the order lines.
Shipping Execution: Sends information required to create the cost of goods
sold account.
Shipping Execution: Sends inbound and outbound requests for booked,
shippable lines.
Advanced Planning and Scheduling: Sends scheduling and sourcing
requests.
Configure to Order: Sends request to create configuration, create work
order.
Customer Relationship Management: Validates i-Payment information.
Configurator: Validates configurations.
Purchasing: Sends cost of goods sold for drop shipments.
Purchasing: Sends externally sourced line information via the Purchase
Release Interface.
Purchasing: Sends changes to internal orders.
Purchasing: Updates return material authorization quantities received.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 11

Order Management Portal (Part of OM)


Order Management Portal (Part of OM)
The Internet Customer Portal is a self-service web
application. A customer can:
View existing orders with a web browser.
Query by criteria, for example, purchase order
number, project number, and sales representative.
View item availability

y
l
n

1-10

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 12

Credit Card Processing


Credit Card Processing
You can validate a customer credit card during
order entry and Oracle iPayment will validate and
return authorization information back to Order
Management.
You can mask sensitive credit card data through a
Profile Option.
Payment capture occurs in AR

y
l
n

1-11

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 13

Agenda

Agenda
Overview of Order Management
Order processing
Customer returns
Implementation considerations
Shipping execution

y
l
n

1-12

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 14

Basic Order Process

Basic Order Process

Customer
Invoice

Order

Order

Shipping

Sales
Department

Inventory

y
l
n

1-13

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 15

Order Entry Methods

Order Entry Methods


Enter order
or return online

Copy an
order or return

Import from
other systems

EDI

Order or return
Enter
order or return

Order Import

Order or return

y
l
n

1-14

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 16

Basic Order Process Flows

Basic Order Process Flows


Invoice only
1
2
3

Standard shippable
Standard shippable
(Distributor)
(Manufacturer)
1
1
Customer requests order
2
2
Enter order
3
3
Book order
4
4
Schedule
5
Release order to Manufacturing
5
6
Ship product and update inventor y
6
7
Invoice the customer

Complete

Complete

Complete

y
l
n

1-15

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 17

Demonstration

Demonstration
This demonstration shows you how to process a
sales order to invoice creation.

y
l
n

1-16

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 18

Returns
Returns
Order and return lines on same order
Common Receiving forms
Record expected Serial/Lot numbers for
informational purposes
Acknowledgments print for returns

y
l
n

1-17

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 19

Vendor Drop Shipments

Vendor Drop Shipments


Supports order
fulfillment of items
to be shipped to
your customers by
your suppliers
Supplier
Single point of
maintenance for
customer addresses
Invoice
and organization
ASN
locations
Purchase
order

Customer

Purchase
order
Invoice

Your
company

y
l
n

1-18

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 20

Vendor Drop Ship or Combination Standard with Drop


Ship Order Flow

Vendor Drop Ship or Combination


Standard with Drop Ship Order Flow
Enter order
Drop Ship: Yes or No?
Drop Ship Item

Internally Sourced Item

Send to Purchasing

Schedule

Supplier ship confirmation

Ship and update inventor y

Create invoice

y
l
n

Close sales order


1-19

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 21

Pricing
Pricing
Through Order Order Management, you can:
Set up price lists
Define pricing attributes
Copy and adjust price lists
Set Government Service Administration
(GSA) pricing
Define pricing formulas
Set up modifiers so you can adjust prices, have
freight and special charges and surcharges
Set up limited qualifiers

y
l
n

1-20

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 22

Configurator
Configurator
The Oracle Configurator is an add-on product in OM
which enables you to use bills of material and
establish rules to configure-to-order (CTO) and
validate option choices.
Customers may select from these options when
ordering product.
You can select options with an assemble-to-order
(ATO) or a pick-to-order (PTO) bill of material (BOM)
even if you dont purchase the
Oracle Configurator.
Pricing and available to promise capabilities are
provided during the configuration process.

y
l
n

1-21

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 23

Agenda

Agenda
Overview of Order Management
Order processing
Customer returns
Implementation considerations
Shipping execution

y
l
n

1-22

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 24

Standard Return
Standard Return

Create Return Order

Verify status header

Book RMA

and lines using workflow monitor

Single RMA, originating transaction


is unknown

From Oracle AR, run auto invoice

Check on hand quantity of item

Receive RMA using receipts

to create credit memo

in inventory to verify correct amount

from Oracle receiving module


Purchasing

Check the authorized and


accepted quantity on the RMA line

y
l
n

1-23

Return Material Authorization Overview


Order Management provides sophisticated tracking of your Return Material
Authorizations (RMA). Returns from a customer occur for a variety of reasons
including damage, shipment error, or sampling. Return material processing
functionality enables you to manage the expectations of customers while
controlling inventory receipts and customer credit processing.
Major Features
Return Material Authorizations (RMA): Order Management enables you to accept
returns for credit, repair or replacement for any reason that you authorize. Order
processing controls enable you to establish the appropriate activity for your
different returned goods channels.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 25

Agenda

Agenda
Overview of Order Management
Order processing
Customer returns
Implementation considerations
Shipping execution

y
l
n

1-24

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 26

Setup and Implementation


Setup and Implementation
Before you use Oracle Order Management, you must
define business policies, various features, and
defaults. You can do this by using:
Profile Options
Workflow
Processing Constraints
QuickCodes
Transaction Types
Attribute Controls
Defaulting Rules
Item Categories

y
l
n

1-25

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 27

Setup and Implementation


Setup and Implementation
You will also need to set up:
Inventory items and item relationships
Bills of Materials for ATO and PTO items
Customer Items
Catalog groups
Tax information
Price lists and pricing modifiers, qualifiers, and
formulas
Credit check processes
Any other options you require

y
l
n

1-26

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 28

Reports
Reports
There are many standard reports available in Oracle
Order Management.
You can use these reports to help you manage your
business requirements.
There are several categories of reports useful in
managing the order process.
Setup related
Order related
Credit order related
Exception
Administrative

y
l
n

1-27

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 29

Agenda

Agenda
Overview of Order Management
Order processing
Customer returns
Implementation considerations
Shipping execution

y
l
n

1-28

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 30

Shipping Execution Concepts


Shipping Execution Concepts

Trips
Stop
Delivery
Delivery leg

y
l
n

1-29

These are the key concepts behind the application. Becoming familiar with
these concepts will make learning the application much easier.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 31

Shipping Execution Concepts

Shipping Execution Concepts


Trip
Is carrier-specific (such as UPS, DHL, FedEx)
Contains deliveries and departs from a particular
location
Must contain at least two stops (such as San
Francisco, New York, Miami, and Dallas)
San Francisco

Trip 1

Stop 2
NY

Stop 1

Trip 1
Stop 4
Dallas

Trip 1
Stop 3
Miami

y
l
n

1-30

Trips
Trip 1
San Francisco to New York, New York to Miami, and Miami to Dallas.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 32

Shipping Execution Concepts

Shipping Execution Concepts


Stop
Point along the route that a trip makes to its final
destination
Can consist of pick-ups, drop-offs, or both

San Francisco

Trip 1

Stop 2
NY

Stop 1

Trip 1
Stop 4
Dallas

Trip 1
Stop 3
Miami

y
l
n

1-31

Stops
A Stop represents a point along the route that a trip makes to its final
destination e.g,. New York. This point may also have some activity associated
with it. The activity might include picking up a new delivery, dropping off a
delivery, or both.
Trip 1
San Francisco (stop 1) to New York (stop 2), New York to Miami (stop 3), and
Miami to Dallas (stop 4).

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 33

Shipping Execution Concepts

Shipping Execution Concepts


Delivery
Consolidation of sales order lines by attributes
Based on user defined criteria:
Mandatory grouping criteria consi sts of:
Customer
Ship from location
Ultimate ship to location
An optional grouping criteria include carrier, freight
terms, freight on board (FOB), intermediate ship to
location, freight terms, ship method, FOB code, and
carrier.

y
l
n

1-32

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 34

Shipping Execution Concepts

Shipping Execution Concepts


Delivery Leg
Consists of at least two stops and one leg or trip
Represented by the bill of lading

Trip 1
San Francisco
Stop 2
Delivery 1, Leg 1
NY
Stop 1
Leg 1 Delivery 2
Stop 4
Leg 1
Dallas
Stop 3
Miami
Delivery 3

y
l
n

1-33

Delivery Leg
A delivery leg consists of two stops where the delivery is picked up and
dropped off respectively on the same trip. The delivery may travel through
several legs to get to its final destination. A delivery leg is synonymous with the
bill of lading.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 35

Material Picking (Pick Release)


Material Picking (Pick Release)
Material picking waves
Manage staging locations
Report inventory shortages
Take advantage of cross-docking opportuni ties

Configurable process (four steps)


1. Pick release
2. Move order line detailing*
3. Move order line pick confirmation*
4. Ship confirmation
* May be automated

y
l
n

1-34

Material Picking (Pick Release)


Oracle Shipping Execution enables you to use move orders transactions for
generating pick requests and reservations in Oracle Inventory.
With the new pick release engine, you can pick release all items together on a
trip or stop. You can also pick release items together on a delivery.
Using the new engine, pick release can be performed using a one-two-or threestep process.
The one-step process consists of select both the auto detail and auto pick
confirm check boxes on the Inventory tab when you run pick release, which
means that the pick recommendation is automatically created and pick
confirmed without any manual intervention.
The two-step process consists of selecting auto detail, but not auto pick confirm,
which creates a move order that is automatically detailed but enables you to
view the pick recommendation and provides the opportunity to change quantity,
location, and subinventory, and to report a missing quantity at the pick
confirmation step in the transact move orders window. Once you have made
your changes, you can transact the move order to pick confirm the inventory.
The three-step process consists of selecting neither the auto detail or auto pick
confirm check boxes, which creates a move order that you can manually or
automatically detail in the transact move orders window. Once detailed, you
can transact the move order to pick confirm the transaction.

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 36

Pick Confirmation
Pick Confirmation
The move order line details (transaction lines) created
by the detailing process must be transacted to confirm
the material drop-off in staging:
Transacts move order details to staging
subinventory
Transfers reservation to staging location:
Can report discrepancies
Can change detail

Auto pick confirm


Set as default in the Organization Parameters window
Can be overridden at pick release

y
l
n

1-35

Pick Confirmation
The move order line details (transaction lines) created by the detailing process
must be transacted to confirm the material drop-off in staging. This process is
called pick confirmation.
Pick confirmation executes the subinventory transfer that moves the material
from its source location in the warehouse into the staging location. Pick
confirmation automatically transfers the high level reservation to a detailed
reservation (including lots, subinventory, revisions, and locators) in the staging
location. At pick confirmation, a user can report a missing quantity or change
the transaction line if the picker chose to use material from a different lot, serial,
locator, or subinventory. If an organizations picks rarely deviate from the
suggested picking lines and the overhead of requiring a pick confirmation is
unmanageable, the pick confirm transactions can occur immediately after the
lines are detailed. This option is called auto pick confirm. Users can set up a
default pick confirm policy in the Inventory organization parameters. This
default can be overridden at each pick release.
Note that even if an automatic pick confirm is employed, the material is only
transacted to the staging subinventory and reserved. A user can still manage
any discrepancies found by deleting the reservation and transacting the material
back to its original subinventory. If mobile devices such as bar code scanners

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 37

are used to perform inventory transactions, you should use manual pick
confirmation for greatest inventory accuracy and control.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 38

Ship Confirmation Business Flow

Ship Confirmation Business Flow


Order
Management

OM

Ship
Confirmation

SE
Invoice
Information

Invoice
Information

Inventory
Information

IM

AR

Inventory

Receivables

y
l
n

1-36

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 39

Prerequisites for Ship Confirmation


Prerequisites for Ship Confirmation
The delivery lines must be released.
The delivery must be open or packed.
At least one delivery line must be assigned to the
delivery.

y
l
n

1-37

(N) Shipping > Transactions (I) Flashlight Icon Search for the
Delivery (B) Find (B) Actions (M) Ship Confirm (B) Go

O
e

s
U

(Help) Oracle Manufacturing Applications > Oracle Shipping


Execution > Managing Deliveries > Ship Confirming a Delivery

&
l
a

I
A
O

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 40

Summary
Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:
Describe the process flow of Oracle Order
Management
Identify the implementation considerations of
Oracle Order Management

y
l
n

1-38

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 41

Practice: Create Sales Order and Invoice


Task
Create Sales Order and Invoice

Solution
Symbols Legend
(N) = Navigate
(T) = Tabbed Region
(I) = Icon on Toolbar
[B] = Button
In the Oracle Vision Demonstration Database,
Responsibility > Order Management, Super User (Vision Operations,
USA)
Step 1 Book the order
1. Orders, Returns > Sales Orders

y
l
n

2. Order Information, (T) Main

Customer: Hilman & Associates


Order Type: Mixed
Price List: Corporate
Salesperson: Accept Default

3. (T) Line Items


Ordered Item
AS54888

Qty
5

&
l
a

O
e

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

4. [B] Book Order and note the order number _______________.


Step 2 Pick Release and Auto Pick Confirm the Order

n
I
e

1. (N) Shipping > Release Sales Orders > Release Sales Orders

l
c
a

2. (T)

r
O

Order
Order Number: From above
Scheduled Ship Dates: Accept Default
Requested Dates: Accept Default

3. (T) Inventory
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 42

Warehouse: M1 (LOV)
Pick Slip Grouping Rule: Departure, Delivery (Default)
Auto Allocate: Yes (Default)
Auto Pick Confirm: Yes (Default)
[B] Concurrent. Note request number ______
[B] OK. Close the window.

4. (M) View > Requests.


Select View all my Requests
[B] Find
The request status for the Pick Selection List Generation and Pick
Slip Reports should be Completed, Normal. Close the form.
Step 3 Ship Confirm the Order
1. (N) Shipping > Transactions
2. Query Manager Form is displayed

Select the Lines Search button (Default)


Enter your order number.
[B] Find
3. (T)

Delivery
Actions. Select Ship Confirm
[B] Go.
[B] Select the checkbox to Ship All in the Confirm Delivery Form.
Leave remaining defaults
[B] OK

y
l
n

O
e

s
U

4. A message will display to inform you that the inventory interface is triggered.

I
A
O

Note the Request Number _____________.

5. Close the Shipping Transaction window.

&
l
a

Step 4 Running the Workflow Background Process

n
r
te

1. Navigate to Inventory > Workflow Background Engine


2. Parameters
Item Type: OM Order Line
Process Deferred: Yes
Process Timeout: NO
Click OK
Click Submit
View > Request
Select View all my Request
Click Find

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 43

Work flow Background Engine should be competed Normal. Close


the form.
Step 5 Running Autoinvoice - Depending on the patch level this step
may have been run automatically.
1. (N) > Receivables > Interfaces > Autoinvoice
2. Single Request
3. Name: Autoinvoice Master Program
4. Parameters
Number of Instances: 1
Invoice Source: Order Entry
Default Date: Current Date
(Low) Sales Order Number: Current Order Number (If it is not
available, the program has already run automatically)
(High) Sales Order Number: Current Order Number
Click OK
Click Submit
View > Request
Select View all my Request
Click Find
Work flow Background Engine should be competed Normal. Close
the form.
Step 6 Viewing the Invoice in Accounts Receivables

2. Click on the flashlight

&
l
a

I
A
O

O
e

s
U

Responsibility > Receivables, (Vision Operations, USA)


1. (N) Transactions > Transactions

y
l
n

3. Enter the Sales Order Number

n
r
te

4. Click Find

5. This is the invoice that was created in Accounts Receivables

n
I
e

6. Note the Number field in the upper left hand corner. This is your invoice
number for your order.

l
c
a

r
O

Step 7 Invoice Viewing


Responsibility > Order Management, Super User (Vision Operations,
USA)
Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 44

1. (N) Order , Returns > Order Organizer

Order Number: From this practice


[B] Find
[B] Open
2. (T) Line Items

[B] Actions. Select Additional Line Information from the LOV.


(T) Deliveries: View the Delivery that the item was assigned to.
(T) Receivables: View the Invoice that was created for the item.

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 45

y
l
n

O
e

&
l
a

I
A
O

s
U

n
r
te

n
I
e

l
c
a

r
O

Copyright Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

Oracle Order Management


Chapter 8 - Page 46

You might also like